HP StoreOnce G2 - NAS

StoreOnce G2 - NAS HP - Free user manual and instructions

Find the device manual for free StoreOnce G2 HP in PDF.

📄 178 pages English EN Download 💬 AI Question
Notice HP StoreOnce G2 - page 6
Pick your language and provide your email: we'll send you a specifically translated version.

User questions about StoreOnce G2 HP

0 question about this device. Answer the ones you know or ask your own.

Ask a new question about this device

The email remains private: it is only used to notify you if someone responds to your question.

No questions yet. Be the first to ask one.

Download the instructions for your NAS in PDF format for free! Find your manual StoreOnce G2 - HP and take your electronic device back in hand. On this page are published all the documents necessary for the use of your device. StoreOnce G2 by HP.

USER MANUAL StoreOnce G2 HP

G2 Backup System user guide

Abstract

This is the user guide for the following G2 and G2-E HP StoreOnce Backup Systems:

• HP D2D4300 Series: HP D2D4324 and HP D2D4312

• HP D2D4100 Series: HP D2D4112 and HP D2D4106

•HP D2D2500 Series: HP D2D2504 and HP D2D2502

Some features described in this guide may not be activated on your product. Refer to the Quick Specs on http://www.hp.com for supported features for your model and the current status. See the PDF version of the product's Installation and Configuration guide (available from the HP web site) for all installation and hardware cabling instructions.

NOTE: Much of the information is also relevant for the older G1 products. Although these products are now discontinued, they are still supported and Appendix A includes any information that is specific to the older G1 products.

© Copyright 2011–2013 Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P.

Confidential computer software. Valid license from HP required for possession, use or copying. Consistent with FAR 12.211 and 12.212, Commercial Computer Software, Computer Software Documentation, and Technical Data for Commercial Items are licensed to the U.S. Government under vendor's standard commercial license.

The information contained herein is subject to change without notice. The only warranties for HP products and services are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services. Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warranty. HP shall not be liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained herein.

WARRANTY STATEMENT: To obtain a copy of the warranty for this product, see the warranty information website:

http://www.hp.com/go/storagewarranty

Linear Tape-Open, LTO, LTO Logo, Ultrium and Ultrium Logo are trademarks of Quantum Corp, HP and IBM in the US, other countries or both.

Microsoft, Windows, Windows NT, and Windows XP are U.S. registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.

Intel and Itanium are trademarks or registered trademarks of Intel Corporation or its subsidiaries in the United States and other countries.

AMD is a registered trademark of Advanced Micro Devices, Inc.

The StoreOnce Backup System product firmware includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit.

(http://www.openssl.org/. See separate copyright statement included on the CD.

Contents

1 Getting started....6

Introduction......6

What is the Web Management interface?......6

To run the Web Management Interface....6

Initial logon and Welcome message....7

2 Home, Summary......8

Summary (Home)....8

3 Virtual Tape Devices....10

Devices (Virtual Tape Devices)....10

Making Replication Target libraries visible to the host....16

Cartridges (Virtual Tape Devices)....18

4 NAS....21

Shares (NAS)......21

Configuring NAS targets for CIFS....22

Configuring users on AD (CIFS shares only)....24

Configuring NAS shares for NFS....30

5 Appliance Configuration....33

Network (Configuration)....33

Fibre Channel (Configuration)....36

iSCSI (Configuration)....36

SNMP (Configuration)....37

HP Systems Insight Manager....39

Email Alerts (Configuration)....43

To configure Microsoft Exchange Server....44

6 Status....46

System Activity (Status)....46

Storage (Status)....46

Storage pool tab....47

Disks tab....49

RAID....50

Shelves....51

Disk (Status)....52

RAID (Status)....54

Network (Status)....54

iSCSI (Status)....55

Fibre Channel (Status)....55

Storage Reporting (Status)....56

Log (Status)....57

7 Replication....58

Status (Replication)....58

Virtual Tape Mappings (Replication)....59

Running the replication wizard (virtual tape devices)......61

NAS Mappings (Replication)......66

Running the replication wizard (NAS)....69

Partner Appliances (Replication)....73

Source Appliance Permissions tab....76

Local Appliance (Replication)....77

Event History (Replication)....81

8 Administration....82

User Account (Administration)....82

Security (Administration)......83

Date & Time (Administration)....85

Housekeeping (Administration)......87

Shutdown (Administration)......88

Software (Administration)......88

Support (Administration)....91

Backup & Restore (Administration)....93

License (Administration)....94

9 Restore processes with replication....96

Recovering a Source Appliance (Virtual Tape devices)....96

Reverse replication using the wizard....96

Promoting a Target Library over the WAN using iSCSI....100

Promoting a target library using colocation....101

Recovering a Source Appliance (NAS shares)....104

Reverse replication using the wizard....104

Promoting a Target Share over the WAN using NAS....107

Promoting a Target Share using colocation....108

10 Restore processes without replication....111

Restore scenarios....111

Restoring single files....111

Restore and deduplication....111

Reconnecting to the to iSCSI VTL devices after host failure....112

11 Understanding LEDs....115

HP D2D4324/4312 Backup System....115

HP D2D4112/4106 Backup System....116

HP D2D2502/2504 Backup System....117

Hot-plug drive LEDs....118

Fibre Channel card LEDs....119

Capacity upgrade kit LEDs....119

12 Hardware monitoring....121

Resolving problems....122

13 Troubleshooting....125

Connecting to the StoreOnce Backup System from the backup application....125

Connecting to the network....125

Using the 10Gb ports (HP D2D4300 Series only)....126

Performance....126

Web Management Interface errors and warnings....127

Power On/Off Problems....128

Cannot connect to Web Management Interface....129

NFS State handle error....129

Cannot authenticate an iSCSI session....130

Diagnostic Fibre Channel device....130

If the HP StoreOnce Backup System runs out of disk space....130

Cannot access a storage shelf (HP D2D4100 and 4300 Series Backup Systems)....131

If backup or replication fails....131

Recovering Devices that have 'failed to start' or have become read-only....132

StoreOnce Backup System configuration problems....134

Upgrade licenses....134

Replacement of hardware....134

Upgrades to component parts....135

14 Hard disk replacement....136

RAID....136

How do I know a disk has failed?....137

Replacing a hot-plug hard disk 142

After replacing the failed disk....144

If several disks fail....146

Replacing the disks (HP D2D2500 Series)....146

Replacing the disks (HP D2D4300/4100 Series)....148

Creating cartridges (Virtual Tape Devices only)....152

A Extra information for G1 products....153

Overview....153

Major differences....153

VTL devices....153

NAS devices....153

Tape Attach....154

Seeding Virtual Tape Devices using Tape Attach....154

Configuration (Tape Attach)....154

Manual jobs (Tape Attach)....157

Scheduled jobs (Tape Attach)....160

Active Jobs (Tape Attach)....164

Job History (Tape Attach)....165

Glossary....167

About this guide....171

Index....174

1 Getting started

In this chapter:

  • Introduction (page 6)
    •What is the web management interface (page 6)
    •To run the Web Management Interface (page 6)
  • Initial logon and Welcome message (page 7)

Introduction

This guide contains detailed information on using the HP StoreOnce Backup System Web Management Interface. It also contains troubleshooting information. The following documents are also available:

  • HP StoreOnce Backup System Concepts Guide: If you are new to the HP StoreOnce Backup System, it is a good idea to read this guide before you configure your system. It describes the StoreOnce technology.
  • HP StoreOnce Backup System Installation and Configuration Guide: This guide describes how to install and carry out the initial configuration of your HP StoreOnce Backup System.
    D2D Best Practices for VTL, NAS and Replication implementations: This white paper advises how to plan the workload being placed on the HP StoreOnce Backup System in order to optimize performance and minimize the impact of deduplication, replication and housekeeping operations competing for resources. It is regularly updated.

NOTE: This guide describes mainly how to monitor and configure the HP StoreOnce Backup System using the Web Management Interface. There are other ways of connecting to the appliance using either a system console or the iLO2 management port. See the HP StoreOnce Backup System Installation and Configuration Guide for more information about these options.

What is the Web Management interface?

The Web Management Interface is the main interface for:

• Monitoring the status and health of the HP StoreOnce Backup System and all configured backup devices
- Creating and modifying VTL and NAS StoreOnce backup targets
• Managing replication relationships
- Configuring appliance settings

To run the Web Management Interface

There are two ways of logging on:

• From the host server or PC: Use the desktop shortcut created by the Installation wizard.
- From any machine connected to the network: The HP StoreOnce Backup System uses a secure network connection. Enter https:// followed by the IP address or fully qualified domain name (for example, myhpd2d.mydomain.com) of the HP StoreOnce Backup System into the web browser.

NOTE: If you use http: in the URL, you are automatically forwarded to the https: secure network connection.

The Web Management Interface displays the Login prompt:

Name D2DBS User Name Administrator Password Force Login Login Help

The Login is Administrator with an initial password of Admin.

Both names are case sensitive. The password can subsequently be changed from the User Acc (Administration) (page 82) menu option.

Only one active session is supported. You cannot connect to an HP StoreOnce Backup System somebody else is logged into the Web Management Interface. However, Force Login is enabled by default and this will disconnect an active session.

After a period of 20 minutes of user inactivity the session will time out and return to the Logi screen. It is possible to change this Inactive Logout Time from the User Accounts (Administration page.

NOTE: The web browser used to communicate with the StoreOnce Backup System must have Active Scripting or JavaScript enabled. If it does not, some of the browser buttons may not be displayed.

Initial logon and Welcome message

Initial logon

The first time that you log on after installation you will notice an information message advising that "RAID Parity Initialization" is occurring. This is normal and does not require you to take action. The status will become "OK" as soon initialization completes, but it may take some time

Welcome message

Whenever you upgrade software, there will be a pop-up in the Web Management Interface th summarizes all the changes in this upgrade.

Click Close to close the pop-up. It will be displayed the next time you log onto the Web Management Interface.

Click Don't show again to prevent the pop-up from being displayed again. If you want to view the pop-up again, use the option on the User Account page to re-instate it.

2 Home, Summary

Summary (Home)

Whenever you log in, the Summary page is displayed. It is also accessed from Home in the navigation bar.

Use this page:

• To display information about your HP StoreOnce Backup System and its network connection.
- To find out whether you have a G1 or G2 product (in the Type field). This is important when upgrading software.
• To monitor system health and status.

The following example shows the Summary page for an HP D2D4312 Backup System.

D2D Backup System Home Virtual Tape Devices BAS Configuration Status Replication Administration Holborn27 : 16.26.131.62 Layout Help 1 Status Summary System Information 3 Type HP StorageWorks D204312 - G2 Name Holborn27 Up Time 1 Hours 12 Minutes Serial Number C2:934082M Firmware Revision 260.370 Status System State OK Network OK Fibre Channel OK Disk Space Used 3.0 TB of 35.9 TB (8.5%) Deduplication Ratio - User Data Stored 1.0 TB Storage OK RAID OK RAID Battery OK Devices OK Replication OK

NOTE: If a capacity upgrade kit has been installed, the shelves are also shown on the Summary page. (HP D2D2500 Series products do not support connection of a Capacity Upgrade Kit.)

Table 1 Summary page layout

Select the appropriate option from the top bar.Navigation bar1
2Help and logoutThe Help option opens the help pages. This is a context sensitive link that displays help that is appropriate to the currently selected page. Logout closes your session on the HP StoreOnce Backup System. If somebody else logs in, you will be automatically logged out.
3StoreOnce Backup System informationThis section provides the information that identifies your HP StoreOnce Backup System. It shows the Type (Product Generation), Name, Serial Number and Software Revision of the HP StoreOnce Backup System. .The Up Time records how long the HP StoreOnce Backup System has been running.System State is the overall status of the system and relates to the Status icon four in the top right-hand corner of all pages.Appliance State: shows whether the StoreOnce Backup System is Initialising/Running/Shutting down/Stopping. It also includes any hardware failure indications.
Status details4This section provides details about overall system status and the status of the network (HP D2D4300 Series) or network ports (all other models), RAID, disk usage, user data stored, deduplication ratio, and any licensed features, such as replication.Additional information is provided if the status is not OK. See also (page 9).Disk Space Used is the amount of disk space that has been used. Deduplication is updated whenever data is written to storage. User Data Stored shows how mu user data has been backed up to unit.Storage is the first place to look to identify any problems with the storage pool (shelves and disks) on HP D2D4100/4300 Series). A failed disk should be replaced as soon as possible. See Hard disk replacement (page 136).RAID and RAID battery are the first place to look to identify any problems with the RAID status and RAID battery. A failed battery should be replaced as soon as possible. See the HP StoreOnce Backup System Maintenance and Service Guide.Devices informs the user of the status of the libraries and NAS shares within the StoreOnce Backup System. After a power up or reset, each device is checked and brought on line. This can take a long time, especially after an unscheduled power fail, where the message will show 'Starting'.Disk Licensing for models that support a Capacity Upgrade Kit will show a warning message if you have not yet provided the licensing information. See License (Administration) (page 94).Replication status is shown if you have licensed and enabled this feature. If you have enabled the Network Time Protocol (from the Date & Time (Status) page), the status of the NTP process is also shown.

Status icons

Indicates a healthy system or system component. Everything is OK and the system is working correctly.

i Indicates standard information.

Indicates a warning state. Something needs attention but it is not critical to the successful operation of the device. For example, a disk may have failed or disks may be installed in an expansion shelf but not lic

Indicates a critical state. Something needs attention. Investigate immediately.

3 Virtual Tape Devices

The Virtual Tape Devices menu allows you to monitor and configure VTL devices and cartridges. The following options are available.

• Devices (Virtual Tape Devices)
• Backup applications and Replication Target libraries
• Cartridges (Virtual Tape Devices)

These pages allow you to monitor and configure VTL devices. If you are a new user, we strongly recommend that you read the following documents, which are available from the HP web site. They provide a detailed discussion about replication deployment strategies and terminology and include worked examples.

  • HP StoreOnce Backup System Concepts Guide: This describes the StoreOnce technology and advises how to plan the workload being placed on the HP StoreOnce Backup System in order to optimize performance and minimize the impact of deduplication, replication and housekeeping operations competing for resources.
    D2D Best Practices for VTL, NAS and Replication implementations: This guide describes best practices and also includes examples using different backup applications.

Devices (Virtual Tape Devices)

If using iSCSI to connect your hosts to virtual tape devices, a default library is created automatically when a new host connects to the HP StoreOnce Backup System. Use this page to view and confirm the default library and to create additional devices, if required, for the host.

NOTE: If the HP StoreOnce Backup System is connected to a Fibre Channel network, it is not possible to create a default library for the host automatically during installation. You must use this page to create and configure devices that can be accessed by the host.

The top half of the page shows a list of devices available on the HP StoreOnce Backup System. There is also a Show/Hide Details Box that provides information about the maximum number of libraries/shares and drives available for the emulation type selected, and the actual number of libraries/shares and drives remaining. This is useful because the Summary details for a selected device only show the Maximum values.

Devices Cartridges Devices Show Details Box Maximum Number of Libraries/Shares 16 Number of Libraries Available 10 Maximum Number of Drives 64 Number of Drives Available 62 Name Cartridges Note Status Connection Device Type Port Library 1 24 Non Replicating Online Not Connected VSL G3 Series (2x24) / LT03 ISCSI Port Igt 24 Non Replicating Online Not Connected VSL G3 Series (2x24) / LT03 No Port New Library Device Details ISCSI Authentication Library Name Library 7 Emulation Type D2085 Generio Drive emulation LT03 Total No Of Cartridge Slots 8 (Range: 8 - 1024, Default: 8) Number of Drives 60 Cartridge Size 400 Ob Deduplication Port ISCSI Port No of Barcode Characters Six Right Barcode Justification Left Right ISCSI Initiator Name

Summary information is provided for each device, as follows:

Table 2 Device parameters (top half of the page)

NameThis is the name that is used to identify that device (library or autoloader). You may like t enter a name that identifies the host or backup job with which it is associated.
CartridgesThis is the number of cartridges available on the device, which is determined by the Emulat Type selected when the device was created. You can reduce the number of slots on this page, but this will only remove the highest blank slots. Once it reaches a slot number that contains data, it will not allow you to reduce the number further on this page, even if ear slots are blank. You must first use the Cartridges tab to make the slot blank.
RoleThis is the role of the library, which may be non-replicating, replication source or replicatio target.
This is the status of the library, which may be online, offline or failed to start.Status
ConnectionIf a device is shown as not connected, this indicates that the iSCSI Initiator on the host he not logged on.With a FC device, this field shows the connection status of the FC link and its speed: dov 1G, 2G or 4G for HP D2D4100 Series; 2G, 4G or 8G for HP D2D4300 Series).
Device TypeThis is the emulation type used by the backup software. It is selected during installation or when you create a device.
PortThis identifies the port to which the host is connected for backup and restore. The number of ports available in the drop-down menu depends upon your network configuration.There is always an iSCSI port. With the HP D2D4300 Series both the 1–Gb and 10–Gb ports may be used for the iSCSI data connection, but the 10–Gb ports are recommended for data transfer. This is configured on the Network (Configuration) page.FC products have two FC ports on the pre-installed FC card and these are also listed in the Port drop-down menu.

NOTE: If the StoreOnce D2D Backup system detects a possibly issue with data integrity for a virtual tape library it will immediately set the status of that device to 'failed-to-start' or 'read-on this is to minimize the possibility of any further potential corruption being introduced on the device. If a device enters one of these states it is reported on the GUI. Selecting that device will give some options to attempt to restore the device to a working state. For more details see Recovering devices that have failed to start or have become read-only (page 132).

Emulation types for tape devices

HP StoreOnce Backup Systems emulate a range of physical tape devices, which are listed below

NOTE: Not all products support all emulation types. If the emulation type is not in the dropdown list, it is not supported on your model. For example, HP D2D2500 Series do not support the and EML-e Library emulation types.

D2DBS Generic Library: This is a tape library device which allows you to configure many drives per library and many cartridges per library

° HP D2D2502/2504: up to 16 (HP D2D2502) and 32 (HP D2D2504) drives per libra and up to 96 cartridges per library
° HP D2D4106/4112: up to 64 (HP D2D4106) and 96 (HP D2D4112) drives per library and up to 1024 cartridges per library
- HP D2D4312/4324: up to 200 drives per library and up to 4096 cartridges per library If it is supported by your backup application, this is the preferred emulation type to be used because it does not emulate any physical library types in existence and is, therefore, clean identifiable as a StoreOnce device. It is the most flexible emulation type available; however, backup application support varies by software vendor.

If you have selected D2DBS Generic for the Library Emulation Type, you will be able to select Ultrium VT for the drive emulation. This is a generic Ultrium device which is clearly identifiable as virtual. Backup application support for Ultrium VT is reasonable, but not quite as complete as the D2DBS library type, so its not possible to use it with all backup software.

NOTE: Symantec prefer their customers to use this emulation type with BackupExec and Netbackup.

  • HP 1x8 G2 Autoloader: This is a single Ultrium tape drive autoloader with a maximum of 24 cartridge slots. It should be used for simple rotation schemes where a single backup job is to run at a time. This emulation type is widely supported by backup applications, but mainly of use with the HP D2D2500 Series.
  • MSL G3 series (2x24) Library: This is a tape library device with a maximum of two embedded Ultrium tape drives and 24 cartridge slots. It should be used when implementing rotation schemes which involve simultaneous backup jobs to two devices. This emulation type is widely supported by backup applications.
  • MSL G3 series (4x48) Library: This is a tape library device with a maximum of four embedded Ultrium tape drives and 48 cartridge slots. It should be used when implementing rotation schemes which involve simultaneous backup jobs to more than two devices or those that use a large number of cartridges devices. This emulation type is widely supported by backup applications.
  • MSL G3 series (8x96) Library: This is a tape library device with a maximum of four embedded Ultrium tape drives and 96 cartridge slots.
  • ESL-E series Library: This is an enterprise tape solution which allows you to configure many drives per library and many cartridges per library (see values for D2DBS emulation above). Use the Show Details Box at the top of the screen to view maximum details and actual numbers used.
  • EML-E series Library: This is an enterprise tape library solution which allows you to configure many drives per library and many cartridges per library (see values for D2DBS emulation above). Use the Show Details Box at the top of the screen to view maximum details for d and libraries and actual numbers used.

Flexible emulation (G2 products only)

If supported, the ESL, EML and D2DBS emulations are particularly flexible because they allow you to configure a large number of drives per library. This has two main benefits:

  • It allows for more concurrent streams on backups which are throttled due to host application throughput, such as multi-streamed backups from a database.
  • It allows for a single library (and therefore dedupe store) to contain similar data from backups that must run in parallel to increase deduplication ratio.

If using these flexible emulation types, the following factors should also be considered:

Although there are no hard limits on the number of drives that can be configured per library, there are limits on the total number of devices and shares that can be configured on an appliance. If you configure 1 library with 200 drives on an HP D2D4312 Backup System, you will still have 49 libraries available in theory, but you will have no more drives.

- The total value also applies to NAS shares. If you configure the full 250 value as VTL devices, you will not be able to configure any NAS shares for that appliance.

- Please refer to the D2D Best Practices for VTL, NAS and Replication implementations for maximum and recommended values.

NOTE: G1 products do not support flexible emulation; they have fixed values for the above emulation types (some products do not support all emulation types).

Libraries, slots and storage capacity

It is recommended to:

• Only configure the libraries that you need
- Only configure the number of cartridges that you are likely to need

You can add cartridges at a later date to expand the system and remove individual blank car from a library without deleting the whole library, but cannot remove cartridges that have been written to.

Source and target libraries

Target libraries are created if you have a replication license when you create a replication ma Source libraries are always visible to the host; Target libraries are not normally visible to the but you can configure devices to make them visible to backup applications. This feature should used with care because some backup applications will fail if they are able to see duplicate ca barcodes in two libraries simultaneously.

Target libraries for replication may be created with 0 drives.

To view device details

Click on a device in the top half of the page to view its details in the bottom half of the page where you can also edit and delete details. There are three tabs with device information. See Device tabs (page 13).

To create a new device

  1. To create a new device for the host, click on Create library.
  2. Enter the appropriate details in the Libraries tab and click Create. There is also a tab to enable and configure iSCSI Authentication, if this is required. Any information you enter on this to must match the information that you have configured in the iSCSI Initiator itself. (See the StoreOnce Backup System Installation and Configuration Guide for more information c configuring the iSCSI initiator.)

New Library Device Details Interface Information Library Name Library 8 Emulation Type MSL G3 Series (2x24) Drive emulation LTO 3 Total No Of Cartridge Slots 24 Number of Drives 1 Cartridge Size 600 Gb Deduplication Port FC Port 1 No of Barcode Characters Sk Eight Borcode Justification Left Right Cancel Create

Table 3 Device tabs (lower half of the page)

Libraries tab
Library NameThis is the name that is used to identify that device. You may like to enter a name that identifies the host or backup job with which it is associated.
Emulation TypeThis is the emulation type used by the backup software. The HP StoreOnce Backup System supports a number of emulation types, see (page 11). The emulation type determines how many embedded drives and cartridge slots are available. For example, if you select HP MS G3 Series (2x24), the device will emulate an MSL 2024 Library with two embedded tape drives and a possible total of 24 cartridge slots. Consult your backup application technical support information for further details.
Drive EmulationBy selecting a drive emulation type, HP LTO-2, 3, 4 or 5, you set only the default capacity of the cartridges within the library device. (LTO-2 = 200 GB, LTO-3 = 400 GB, LTO-4 = 800 GB, LTO-5 = 1.6 GB.) It does not affect the ability of the backup application to writeto the device and tape cartridge capacities can be increased at any time (but not decreased), as long as the cartridge is blank, regardless of the drive generation number.If you have selected D2DBS Generic for the Library Emulation Type, you will be able to select Ultrium VT for the drive emulation. This is a generic Ultrium device which is clearly identifiable as virtual. Backup application support for Ultrium VT is reasonable, but not quite as complete as the D2DBS library type, so its not possible to use it with all backup software.
Total No of Cartridgeslots:This is where you define the number of slots that you require for your tape rotation strategy.The number of slots available depends upon the Emulation Type that you have selected.Each slot will be automatically populated with a new cartridge upon creation whose capacity is appropriate to the Drive Emulation type.You can change the maximum size of the cartridge as long as it is blank. This means that you can only change the value immediately after the device is created and before it has been accessed by the backup application.
Number of drives:The default number of drives is determined by the Emulation Type that you have selected. If you increase the number of drives be careful not to exceed the maximum number of libraries and drives that a host can physically access. (64 for iSCSI interfaces and 128 for FC interfaces.)
Deduplication:Data deduplication is enabled by default for the library device. It is not possible to disable deduplication on any HP StoreOnce G2 Backup System.
Port:This identifies the network port on the HP StoreOnce Backup System to which the device is connected. This will be the port used for the Library device as well as the default port for embedded tape drives. The choices in the drop-down menu depend upon your network configuration. There are up to two iSCSI ports (this depends upon your network mode), and two FC ports if you have the FC model. FC users may choose to connect the device to an iSCSI or a FC port. It is possible to change the tape device ports after creation.
No of BarcodeCharacters:The HP StoreOnce Backup System generates barcodes automatically for cartridges. This option allows you to select whether the barcodes should have six or eight characters. When the user selects 6-character barcodes this is not reflected on the Web Management Interface, which will still show 8-character barcodes. However, when a backup application runs an inventory command it will only see 6-character barcodes.
Barcode Justification:This option allows you to specify which six characters are reported to the backup application when using 6-character barcodes. The six characters that are reported to the backup application are determined by whether the justify option is set to left or right. Setting it to left justify will mean that the first 6 characters of the barcode will be reported to the backup application, right justify will report the last 6 characters. Note that using left justify may result in the backup application seeing barcodes that appear to be duplicates.
iSCSI Initiator Name:(iSCSI devices only)This is the Initiator Node Name of the host that will back up to this device. It is provided automatically for the default library that is created when you run the Installation wizard on a host for a first time. But you must enter it manually if you are creating a new device on this page. If you are using the Microsoft iSCSI Initiator, you can find the name by running the iSCSI Initiator on the host and copying the Initiator Node Name from the General tab.

Devices Camridges Devices + Show Details Box Name Cartridges Role Status Connection Device Type Port Library 3 1024 Non Replicating Online Not Connected DGDBS Generic / LTOS ICSI Port Create library Library 3 Device Details Interface Information ICSI Authentication Device Name Port Device Serial Number World Wide Mode Name Made Changer SCSI Port WXQ0110901 5001438097751636 Drive 1 SCSI Port WXQ0110971 500143809775160A Delete Edit

Table 4 Device tabs continued (lower half of the page)

Interface Information tab
Device NameThis is the device name, such as Medium Changer or Drive 1. There will be an entry for each drive that is appropriate for the selected emulation type.
Device Serial NumberThis is a unique serial number for the device. It is generated automatically by the HPStoreOn Backup System and cannot be edited.
World Wide Node NameThis is provided during manufacturing for all possible devices. You can change this, if necessary, but not to any names that are in use by libraries or drives on the local appliance.
World Wide Port NameThis is generated automatically by the HP StoreOnce Backup System for FC devices. You can change this, if necessary, but not to any names that are in use by libraries or drives the local appliance.
PortIf the library is FC attached, you can choose which port each drive is on using this selection.
iSCSI Authentication tab (iSCSI devices only)
Require initiator to logcheck this box if you require the initiator to logon. You must also provide the Initiator CH, user name and secret.
Initiator CHAP User NameThis should be the same CHAP user name that you configure for the target on the iSCSI Initiator. (On the Microsoft iSCSI Initiator, this is the User Name as it is configured on the Targets tab in the Log On to Target Advanced Settings.)
Initiator CHAP SecretThis should be the same CHAP secret that you configure for the target on the iSCSI Initiatc (On the Microsoft iSCSI Initiator, this is the Target Secret as it is configured on the Targets tab in the Log On to Target Advanced Settings.)
Target required to logcheck this box if you require mutual CHAP authentication, which means that the target must also log on to the initiator. You must also provide the target CHAP user name and secret. On the iSCSI Initiator you must also make sure that mutual authentication is enabled. (On the Microsoft iSCSI Initiator, make sure Perform mutual authentication is checked on the Targets tab in the Log On to Target Advanced Settings.)
Target CHAP User NameThis may be any meaningful CHAP user name. It does not need to match any information on the iSCSI Initiator.
Target CHAP SecretThis should be the same CHAP Secret that you configure for the target on the iSCSI Initiatc (On the Microsoft iSCSI Initiator, this is the Secret as it is configured from the General tab

NOTE: For more information about configuring the Microsoft iSCSI Initiator see the HP StoreOnce Backup System Installation and Configuration Guide.

To edit device details

It is possible to edit some, but not all, device details after creating a device. In particular, yo should be aware of the following:

  • You can delete cartridges by reducing the number of slots on the Devices page, but this will only remove the highest—numbered blank slots. Once the Delete operation reaches a slot number that contains data, it will not allow you to reduce the number further on the Deta page, even if earlier slots are blank. You must first use the Cartridges tab to make the sl blank.
  • If you change the cartridge size on this page, this will only change newly-added cartridges; it does not change the size of cartridges that have already been created.
  • You can reduce the number of drives but, if you go to 0, the port setting will go to "No Port".
  • You cannot change the library type to a type that has a smaller set of maximum values (e.g. number of cartridges) than is currently set.

  • Select the device in the list to display its details and then click on Edit.

  • Amend details as appropriate and click Update to apply them. The information for the Interface Information tab is generated automatically and cannot be changed.

Library 1 Device Details Library Name Library 1 Emulation Type 1x3 G2 Autobased Drive emulation LTO 3 Total No Of Cartridge Slots 0 Number of Drives 1 Deduplication ✓ Creation Time 17:04 2009/10/69 Port No Port No of Barcode Characters Six Right Barcode Justification Left Right Cancel Update

To delete a device

Select the required device and then click on Delete in the Details section to delete it. You will be prompted to confirm that this is what you wish to do.

!

WARNING! All data on the device will be deleted. The library's deduplication store is also deleted. It may take up to 15 minutes to delete all the files and free space on the HP StoreOnce Backup System.

Making Replication Target libraries visible to the host

NOTE: See Replication (page 58) for more details on replication configuration.

Replication Target libraries are not normally visible to the host, but you can configure devices to make them visible to backup applications. This allows the backup application to:

  • Move cartridges from storage slots to drives in the library
    •Perform SCSI commands on the library device
  • Perform read and verify operations on the cartridge (but not write)
    •Perform load/unload operations on the tape device

!

WARNING! This facility should be used with care. If the backup application can see both source and target libraries, it will not be able to distinguish between the source library and the target library because the barcodes are duplicated in the two locations.

Why make target libraries visible?

There are two occasions when it may be useful to make a target library visible to the backup application on the host.

  • To confirm that replication is working correctly and check the integrity of the replicated backup by doing a test restore
    •To perform manual tape copy jobs to any tape device on the network using the backup application

!

IMPORTANT: You cannot change data on a Target library cartridge; you may only load it temporarily into a physical tape device to read it.

Best practices for using this feature

WARNING! If you do not follow these best practices, unstable and possibly damaging results may occur. Cartridges may be marked as unusable or the backup application may attempt to target cartridges.

  • Ensure that no replication jobs to the selected target cartridge are in progress
  • Ideally check that no backup jobs to the mapped source cartridges are scheduled

- Ensure that the backup application media server instance to be used is not within the same cell/domain that can access the source cartridge

- Import the data on the target cartridge into the backup application (this operation must be repeated after each replicate operation to the cartridge)

- Perform the desired operation on the cartridge, which may be:

  • Verify the cartridge using the backup application either using a verify command or by performing a restore
  • Copy the cartridge to a physical tape device connected to the media server

How is a target library made visible?

  1. Create the replication mapping, as normal. See Running the replication wizard (NAS) (page 69) or Running the replication wizard (virtual tape devices) (page 61), as appropriate.

  2. From the host that has access to the target library, on the Virtual Tape Devices-Devices page select the target library in the Devices list.

  3. Click Edit.

  4. The Port defaults to None. Select an iSCSI or FC port, as appropriate.

  5. If you have selected an iSCSI port, enter the iSCSI Initiator Name.

  6. Click Update.

Devices Cartridges Networks Email Alerts Devices Name Cartridges Node Connection Device Type Port Library 1 24 Replication Source Not Connected MSL GS Series (2x24) /LTO-3 ICSI Port target 24 Replication Target Not Connected MSL GS Series (2x24) /LTO-3 No Port target Device Details Interface Information ICSI Authentication Library Name Print Emulation Type Drive emulation Total No Of Cartridge Slots Number of Drivers Deduplication Creation Time 7.51.2009/04/07 Port ICSI RTM ICSI Initiator Name Cancel Update

  1. Now you can make the target library visible from other hosts. For iSCSI devices, log on to target library using the ISCSI Initiator. For FC devices, configure the FC fabric to make the host visible. Target visibility persists even if the power fails or if the replication mapping is removed.

NOTE: To remove target visibility, simply reset the Port to None. You will lose the iSCSI Initiator Node Name and must reenter it to reinstate target visibility.

Cartridges (Virtual Tape Devices)

Use this page to view and configure cartridge settings. The number of slots configured on the Devices page for a library determines the number of cartridge rows that are available to edit on this page.

Devices Cartridges Devices Name Cartridges Role Status Connection Device Type Port Library 2 24 Replication Source Online Not Connected MSL G3 Series (2x24) / LTO 3 iSCSI Port Library 3 24 Replication Target Online Not Connected MSL G3 Series (2x24) / LTO 3 No Port Library 5 24 Non Replicating Online Not Connected MSL G3 Series (2x24) / LTO 3 iSCSI Port Create library Library 3 Location Barcode Used Size Max Size Write Protected Last Written Mail Slot Location Barcode Used Size Max Size Write Protected Last Written Table Drive 1 Location ↑ Barcode Mapped Slot Used Size Max Size Write Protected Last Written Slot 1 ✓ Slot 2 3C416474 ✓ 1.6 GB 400 GB □ 25-Sep-2009 B.57 Slot 3 3C416475 ✓ Blank 400 GB □ - Slot 4 3C416476 ✓ Blank 400 GB □ - Slot 5 3C416477 ✓ Blank 400 GB □ - Slot 6 3C416478 ✓ Blank 400 GB □ - Slot 7 3C416479 ✓ Blank 400 GB □ - Slot 8 3C41647A ✓ Blank 400 GB □ - Slot 9 3C41647B ✓ Blank 400 GB □ - Slot 10 3C41647C ✓ Blank 400 GB □ - Slot 11 3C41647D ✓ Blank 400 GB □ - Slot 12 3C41647E ✓ Blank 400 GB □ - Slot 13 3C41647F ✓ Blank 400 GB □ - Slot 14 3C416480 ✓ Blank 400 GB □ - Slot 15 3C416481 ✓ Blank 400 GB □ - Create All Delete All Create Delete Move Edit

Table 5 Cartridge parameters

Location:The Location column identifies each element of the library that is available to hold a cartridge. There are three types of element:Mail slot: which is a dedicated slot that is used to hold a cartridge that is ready for exporting to or importing from physical tape. Cartridges are moved into the mail slot by the backup application on the host machine, but there is also a Move Cartridge drop-down menu in Edit mode.Tape drive: which is populated when there is activity on a cartridge. You can also move a cartridge into a tape drive by using the Move Cartridge drop-down menu in Edit mode.Slot n: which is one of the standard library slots
Barcode:A barcode is an 8- or 6-digit, alphanumeric, unique identifier for a cartridge within the HP StoreOnce Backup System. Barcodes are shared with the backup application, if requested. The backup application may also choose to assign its own internal identifier to the cartridge but, if it does so, it cannot assign this identifier to the Cartridge ba code.Barcodes are generated automatically but may be edited by the user. If you choose to edit the barcode:It must be unique and must not start with the letters "CLN" or "DG" because these are reserved designations for cleaning and diagnostic cartridges.It should be a minimum of 4 characters. Valid ASCII characters are A-Z, a-z, 0-9, space and hyphen. Anything less than 8 characters will be appended with space characters.
Mapped Slot:This checkbox indicates whether the slot is included in a replication mapping configuration. It cannot be edited from this page.
Used Size:This shows the actual used capacity in MB or GB. If this is Blank, the cartridge may be deleted using the delete icon, see below. Non-blank cartridges cannot be removed so the Remove button will not be shown. Only Blank cartridges can be removed from the mail slot.
Max Size:This defaults to the appropriate capacity for the drive emulation type selected on the Devices tab. This value may be changed if the Used Size is Blank, see below. The maximum value allowed is 3200 GB.
Write Protected:This is a check box that allows you to enable (checked) and disable (unchecked) write protection, see below.
Move Cartridge:This drop-down list is displayed in Edit mode and allows you to move the cartridge to an empty (blank) slot, mail slot or tape drive.
Last Written:This tells you when the cartridge was last written to and is useful when identifying data for copying or exporting.

Empty slots

Empty slots are slots that contain no cartridges; all the fields are empty.

- Tape drive row: A library consists of two devices; a tape drive and changer device. This location refers to the tape drive element of the library. It is normally only populated when backup application on the host is writing to or reading from the library.

  • Mail slot row: This location refers to the slot that is used for importing and exporting data to a physically attached tape drive. It is not used with G2 products.
  • Numbered slot row: This slot is empty after a Delete operation or after the backup application has moved data to the mail slot for export.

Once a numbered slot is empty, the Create button may be used to create a new, blank cart. See (page 20).

To delete a cartridge

If the Used Size of a cartridge is Blank, you will be able to remove it.

Click on the Delete button. There is a new right-hand column, Delete Cartridge.

You can select individual slots by clicking in the appropriate checkboxes. When you have sele the slots where cartridges should be deleted, click Delete. If the Used Size is not Blank, you can still remove it but only space that is occupied by unique data will be freed up.

Alternatively, click Delete All to delete all the cartridges in the library.

NOTE: You can also delete cartridges by reducing the number of slots on the Devices page, but this will only remove the highest blank slots. Once the Delete operation reaches a slot number contains data, it will not allow you to reduce the number further on the Details page, even if slots are blank. You must first use the Cartridges tab to make the slot blank.

To write protect a cartridge

Click Edit for the appropriate cartridge. Check the Write Protected check box for the cartridge. Your backup application will not be able to write any more data to it.

Location ↑ Barcode Mapped Slot Used Size Max Size Write Last Written 5bit 1 00CA48DC ✓ 655 MB 400 GB ✓ □ 29-Oct-2009 14:45

To edit maximum cartridge size

The only times you can resize cartridges are when you first create a library or when you add cartridges and they are blank. Once the cartridges are made available to the backup applicat it formats them ready for use and they are no longer blank, even if you have not yet written to them. Similarly, the erase function on most backup applications does not return the cartridge a completely blank state.

The Max Size defaults to the appropriate capacity for the drive emulation type selected on the Devices tab, but if the Used Size is Blank, you can edit this value. The maximum value allowed is 3200 GB.

Click Edit for the appropriate slot. Select a value from the drop-down menu and click Update.

NOTE: The maximum size indicates the maximum amount of user data that can be written to that cartridge, assuming uncompressed data; it will only be committed when data is written to it. Changing the maximum space does not affect actual disk usage or save disk space, but may be useful if you know you will be moving data to a physical tape with a smaller cartridge capacity.

To create a cartridge

Click on the Create button. There is a new right-hand column, Add Cartridge. Slots that are empty have a checkbox in this column.

You can select individual slots by clicking in the appropriate checkboxes. When you have selected the slots where cartridges should be added, click Create.

Alternatively, click Create all to create a blank cartridge of the size/emulation type selected when the library was first configured in all empty slots.

Library 1 Location Barcode Used Size Max Size Write Add Cartridge Mail Slot Location Barcode Used Size Max Size Write Tape Drive 1 Location Barcode Mapped Slot Used Size Max Size Write Add Cartridge Mark All UnMark All Slot 1 36DF9311 □ 655 MB 400 GB □ Slot 2 36DF9312 □ 1.3 GB 400 GB □ Slot 3 36DF9313 □ Blank 400 GB □ Slot 4 36DF9314 □ Blank 400 GB □ Slot 5 36DF9315 □ Blank 400 GB □ Slot 6 36DF9316 □ Blank 400 GB □ Slot 7 36DF9318 □ Slot 8 Create Cancel

  • If you create a cartridge in an empty slot, the backup application needs to inventory it (add it to its database or catalog) before it can access it.
  • If you create a cartridge in an empty mail slot, you can use the backup application to move the blank, new cartridge to an empty cartridge slot, without having to run an inventory. This saves some processing time.

You may need to restart your backup application services to see the new cartridges.

To move or unload cartridges

The ability to move cartridges is provided, but only to an empty Location (tape drive or numbered slot).

Click on the Move button. There is a right-hand column, Move Cartridge. The Move Cartridge drop-down menu lists available empty slots. (Empty numbered slots are created if you delete a cartridge.)

Use the Unload all Cartridges button to return all cartridges to their slots.

The move and unload options are unlikely to be required very often, but may be useful if the use needs to re-align their library configuration against their backup application should they become out of sync, perhaps because the backup application has crashed, or if the backup application does not support the Move Medium command.

4 NAS

The NAS menu allows you to monitor and configure NAS shares. The following options are available.

•Shares (NAS)
•CIFS Server (NAS)
- Configuring users on AD (CIFS shares only)
•NFS Server (NAS)

These pages allow you to monitor and configure NAS shares. If you are a new user, we stro recommend that you read the following documents, which are available from the HP web site. They provide a detailed discussion about replication deployment strategies and terminology and include worked examples.

  • HP StoreOnce Backup System Concepts Guide: This describes the StoreOnce technology and advises how to plan the workload being placed on the HP StoreOnce Backup System in order to optimize performance and minimize the impact of deduplication, replication and housekeeping operations competing for resources.
    D2D Best Practices for VTL, NAS and Replication implementations: This guide describes best practices and also includes examples using different backup applications.

Shares (NAS)

This tab is used to manage all NAS target devices (referred to as shares) for both CIFS and servers.

NOTE: It is important to understand that the HP StoreOnce network share is intended to be used ONLY by backup applications that "back up to disk". Do not use the NAS target device as drag-and-drop general file store. The one exception to this rule is if you are using the NAS sl to seed an appliance for replication.

Creating NAS shares

The process varies slightly depending upon whether you are creating a CIFS or NFS share, se

  • Creating a CIFS share (page 23)
    •(page 31)

Editing share details

An existing NAS share may be edited to alter any of its parameters.

  1. Select the share on the Shares tab and click Edit.

Shares CIF5 Server NFS Server Shares Name Role Status Access Protocol User Date Stored Created Last Modified Share2 Non Replicating Online CPS - 15.07.2009/10/28 19:36 2009/10/14 Share3 Non Replicating Online CPS - 15.07.2009/10/28 12:18 2009/10/15 Share6 Non Replicating Online CPS - 15.07.2009/10/28 14:36 2009/10/10 Create Share Share2 Share Permissions Name Share2 Description HP D2D Share 2 Access Protocol CPS Network Path U16.28.130.92@Share2 Write Protection Cancel Update

  1. Make the required changes and click Update. When the changes are applied they will take effect immediately. If the NAS server (service) needs to restart, there will be a warning provid to the user, which they can accept to allow all shares to temporarily go offline. Note that yc cannot change the share name once it has been created.

If a share is converted from Read/Write to Read Only, any open items will be force closed which may result in inconsistencies if they are being written to by a backup application. The user will be warned that this could occur before the change is made.

Configuring NAS targets for CIFS

HP StoreOnce Backup Systems provide a CIFS interface in order to provide shares that are accessible to Windows servers.

There are two configuration stages when creating a file share that Windows users can access; both stages are implemented from the Web Management Interface:

  • Configure authentication for the StoreOnce Backup System CIFS server, these settings then apply to all CIFS shares.
  • Create NAS CIFS shares on the HP StoreOnce Backup System

Configuring the CIFS server

  1. Log on to the Web Management Interface for the appliance.
  2. Select NAS.
  3. Select the CIFS Server tab. The CIFS server name is the same as the name of the HP StoreC Backup System device.

Shares CIFS Server NFS Server CIFS Server Authentication None Edit

  1. Click Edit to modify the authentication settings.

There are three authentication options that provide different levels of security for CIFS NAS shares. Before configuring the settings, make sure you know which is appropriate for your network and any extra information that may be needed during configuration. None (default), User, and Windows Active Directory. See the next section for examples and more information about CIFS authentication.

  1. Make changes, as required and click Update. Refer to the next section for worked examples for the various Authentication types.

NOTE: When switching authentication modes the user must log out and back into the Windows client before the new authentication settings will work.

Table 6 Authentication settings

No authenticationSetting authentication to None provides a simple CIFS server configuration that allows for the creation of shares with no protection. All users can access the shares created on the HP StoreOnce Backup System with this authentication setting.
User authenticationSetting authentication to user provides a method of securing the CIFS shares so that they can be accessed only by specified “local” users. Once the server has been set to User mode, it is possible to create new local users by selecting Create User and providing a username and password. These users can then be individually allowed to access any of the shares that are created.NOTE: When creating a new share in User Authentication mode, the user must log out into Windows before they can access the newly created share.
Active Directory (AD) authenticationSetting authentication to AD allows the CIFS server to join a Windows Active Directory of Access to individual CIFS shares is then managed from the Windows domain controller se can provide the names of domain users that will have access. See Configuring users on AD (CIFS shares only) (page 24) for detailed instructions.

Creating a CIFS share

Procedure 1

  1. Log on to the Web Management Interface for the appliance.
  2. Select NAS and display the Shares tab. This tab is used to manage all shares for both CIFS and NFS servers.
  3. Click Create Share.

Shares CIFS Server NFS Server Shares File shares created on the D2D Backup System are intended to be used as targets for backup applications. They should not be used as general purpose storage or for drag-and-drop backups, doing so will result in lower deduplication efficiency and performance. No Shares Configured Create Share Share9 Share Permissions Name Share9 Descriptor HP D2D Share 9 Access Protocol CIFS Write Protection Cancel Create

  1. Provide the following information:

• Name: the name that will be used to identify the share in Windows
•Description: a text description of the share (optional)
•Access Protocol: Select CIFS

The Network Path is /. It is also possible to connect using \\.

There is also an option to enable Write Protection. This should only be used if you want to prevent further backup to the share. If you enable it, any backup jobs currently using that share will fail.

  1. If using User Authentication, select the Permissions tab, this will show the list of users available on the server who can be assigned access to NAS target devices. You may amend permission for individual NAS target devices.

If required, click Edit to amend the permissions for the NAS target device. Check the appropriate Access box and click Update.

NOTE: If using AD Authentication, please refer to Configuring users on AD (CIFS shares only) (page 24).

Shares CIFS Server NFS Server Shares File shares created on the D2D Backup System are intended to be used as targets for backup applications. They should not be used as general purpose storage or for drag-and-drop backups, doing so will result in lower deduplication efficiency and performance. No Shares Configured Create Share Share9 Share Permissions Access Protocol CFS User Name Access No Access bilarddave Cancel Create

NOTE: You will need to log out and back into Windows before you can access the newly created share because you have changed the default Permissions.

  1. The NAS target device is now available as a network drive and you can target it from the backup application. It can also be mapped as a network drive in Windows.

NOTE: The NAS target device is not optimized for general purpose file storage. The HP StoreOnce Backup System is a NAS deduplicating appliance that is optimized for backup.

Connecting to the NAS target device on Windows

To access the NAS target device from a Windows server on the network, enter the / or / in Internet Explorer. It is also possible to connect using \\. If User or AD authentication was set for the CIFS server, you will be prompted to enter a user name and password, which will be /.

NOTE: If the StoreOnce D2D Backup system detects a possibly issue with data integrity for a Share it will immediately set the status of that device to 'failed-to-start' or 'read-only', this is to minimize the possibility of any further potential corruption being introduced on the device. If a device enters one of these states it is reported on the GUI and selecting that device will give you some options to attempt to restore the device to a working state. For more details see Recovering devices that have failed to start or have become read-only (page 132).

Configuring users on AD (CIFS shares only)

Prerequisites

•Domain Controller running:

Windows server 2003°

- Windows server 2003 R2

  • Windows server 2008
  • Windows server 2008 R2

  • User account on Domain Controller with authority to add computers to AD

  • User account on server running DNS to add entries

  • The StoreOnce Backup System hostname MUST contain 15 characters or less. If this is not the case, it must be changed before attempting to join the domain.

  • The system time on the StoreOnce Backup System must be correct and in sync with that of the domain controller. Using the NTP mode on the StoreOnce Backup System to synchronize with a time server is a good way to ensure accurate time keeping. See Date and Time (Administration) (page 85).

!

IMPORTANT: AD Domain Support: StoreOnce products support configuration in a multi-domain tree forest but does not support multi forest domain topologies.

Adding the StoreOnce device to an AD Domain

In order to join a domain:

Procedure 2

  1. Connect to the StoreOnce Web Management Interface and navigate to the NAS - CIFS \$ page
  2. Select the Edit button and choose AD from the drop-down menu.

NOTE: In some configurations the Active Directory Domain Controller requires that an entry for the server name is created before the device can be added to the domain.

  1. Provide the name of the domain that you wish to join e.g "mydomain.local"

Shares CIFS Server NFS Server CIFS Server Authentication AD Domain mydoman.local Cancel Update

  1. Select Update. If the domain controller is found, a popup box will request credentials of a user with permission to join the domain. (Note that joining or leaving the domain will result in failure of any backup or restore operations that are currently running.)
  2. Provide credentials (username and password) of a domain user who has permission to add computers to the domain and select Register.
  3. After a short delay the computer will become a member of the domain.
  4. After joining the domain, the DNS server should be automatically updated (if a DHCP server is used) with Forward and Reverse Lookup zone entries, however, some DNS configurations do not allow this. In this case, or if a DHCP is not used on the network, the user must configure the domain's DNS server to be able to correctly manage the D2D shares, as described below.

To configure entries manually if the DNS server does not update automatically

From a Windows client server that has domain and DNS management tools installed launch the DNS Management Tool. (From the command line type dnsmgmt.msc or launch DNS from the Administrative Tools menu).

Create a new Host(A) record in the forward lookup zone for the domain to which the D2D B System belongs with the hostname and IP address of the D2D Backup System.

disngmt - [DNS:\EDGWARE\Forward Lookup Zones\mydomain.local] File Action View Window Help DNS EDGWARE Forward Lookup Zones _mds.dns.mydomain.local mydomain.local _mds.dns _sites _tcp _udp _DomainDnsZones _ForestDnsZones Reverse Lookup Zones Event Viewer mydomain.local 12 record(s) Name Type Data msdcs _sites _tcp _udp _DomainD ForestrDr (same as (same as (same as edgware heathroa New Host Name (uses parent domain name if blank): d2d-mvq011096w Fully quolified domain name (FQDN): d2d-mvq011096w.mydomain.local. address: 132 .160 0 .110 Create associated pointer (PTR) record Allow any authenticated user to update DNS records with the same owner name Add Host Cancel

Also create a Pointer(PTR) in the reverse lookup zone for the domain for the D2D Backup System by providing the hostname and IP address.

dramgmt - [DNS:EDGWARE\Reverse Lookup Zones\192.160.0.x Subnet] File Action View Window Help DNS EDGWARE Forward Lookup Zones _nscds.mydomain.local mydomain.local _nscds _stos _tcp _udp DomainDnsZones ForestDnsZones Reverse Lookup Zones 192.160.0.x Subnet Event Viewer 192.160.0.x Subnet ( record(s) Name Type Data (same as parent folder) Start of Authority (SOA) [7], edgware.mydomain.loc... (same as parent folder) None Server (NS) edgware.mydomain.local. 192.168.0.: Pointer (PTR) edgware.mydomain.local. New Resource Record Pointer (PTR) Host IP number: 192.168.0 110 Fully qualified domain name (FQDN): 113.0.150.192.in-sddk.orpa Host name: d2d-mxcg011096w.mydomain.local Browse... Allow any authenticated user to update all DNS records with the same name. This setting applies only to DNS records for a new name. OK Cancel

Creating shares and granting access permission

Now that the HP StoreOnce Backup System is part of a domain and can be managed, it is positive to create shares and grant access permission to them for domain account users or groups.

  1. Firstly create a share on the Backup System that is going to be used as a backup target, by selecting NAS — Shares from the Web Management Interface and clicking Create.
  2. Provide a share name and description, then select the CIFS protocol and click Create.

Shares CIFS Server HFS Server Shares File shares created on the D2D Backup System are intended to be used as targets for backup applications. They should not be used as general purpose storage or for drag-and-drop backups, doing so will result in lower deduplication efficiency and performance. No Shares Configured Create Share Share1 Share Permissions Name D2D_Backup_Share_1 Description My first backup share Access Protocol CIFS Write Protection Cancel Create

  1. Now that the D2D Backup System is a member of the domain its shares can be managed from any computer on the domain by configuring a customized Microsoft Management Con (MMC) with the Shared Folders snap-in. To do this first open a new MMC window by type mmc at the command prompt or from the Start Search box. This will launch a new empty window.

Console1 - [Console Root] File Action View Favorites Window Help Console Root Name There are no items to show in this view. Actions Console Root More Actions

  1. To this empty MMC window add the Shared Folders snap-in. Select File — Add/Remove Snap-in ..., then select Shared Folders from the left-hand pane.

Console1 - [Console Root] File Action View Favorites Window Help Add or Remove Snap-ins You can select snap-ins for this console from those available on your computer and configure the selected set of snap-ins. For extensible snap-ins, you can configure which extensions are enabled. Available snap-ins: Snap-in Vendor Security Configurati... Microsoft Cor... Security Templates Microsoft Cor... Server Manager Microsoft Cor... Services Microsoft Cor... Share and Storage ... Microsoft Cor... Shared Folders Microsoft Cor... Storage Explorer Microsoft Cor... Task Scheduler Microsoft Cor... Telephony Microsoft Cor... TPM Management Microsoft Cor... Windows Firewall wit... Microsoft Cor... Windows Server Bac... Microsoft Cor... WMI Control Microsoft Cor... Add > Selected snap-ins: Console Root Edit Extensions... Remove Move Up Move Down Advanced... Description: Displays shared folders, current sessions, and open files. OK Cancel

  1. Click Add > and in the dialog box choose the computer to be managed and select Shares from the View options.

Console1 - [Console Root] File Action View Favorites Window Help Add or Remove Snap-ins Shared Folders Select the computer you want this snap-in to manage. This snap-in will always manage: Local computer: (the computer this console is running on) Another computer: hp-czj020039q.mycompany.local Browse... Allow the selected computer to be changed when launching from the command line. This only applies if you save the console. View All Sessions Shares Open Files < Back Finish Cancel of snap-ins. For Edit Extensions... Remove Move Up Move Down Advanced... Displays shared folders, current sessions, and open files. OK Cancel

  1. Click Finish and OK to complete the snap-in set up.

Console1 - [Console Root\Shares (\\hp-czj020039q.mycompany.local)] File Action View Favorites Window Help Console Root Shares (\\hp-czj020039q.mycompany Share Name Folder Path Type # Client Conn... Description BackupShare1 C:\tmp\nas\mountp... Windows 0 File Server 1 Backup C$ C:\wcfs Windows 0 Default Share DPBackupShare1 C:\tmp\nas\mountp... Windows 0 HP D2D Share 3 IPC$ C:\ Windows 0 Remote IPC NEWBackupShare1 C:\tmp\nas\mountp... Windows 0 Migrated Data Share Actions Shares (...) More ... >

Note that the Folder Path field contains an internal path on the D2D Backup System.

  1. Save this customized snap-in for future use.
  2. Select the Share Permissions tab and Add a user or group of users from the domain. Specify the level of permission that the users will receive and click Apply.

Computer Management File Action View D20_Backup_Share_1 Properties General Publish Share Permissions Group or user names: Administrator (MyDOMAIN\Administrator) BackupUsers (MyDOMAIN\BackupUsers) Add... Remove Permissions for Administrator: Allow Deny Full Control ✓ ✓ ✓ Change ✓ ✓ ✓ Read ✓ ✓ ✓ OK Cancel Apply Type # Client Windows 0 Windows 0 Windows 0

  1. Now from any Windows server on the domain it is possible to access the newly created s using the credentials of anyone who had been given permission to access the share. If a permitted user is logged into Windows, access to the share will be granted automatically those permissions.

NOTE: In some cases, when switching the StoreOnce Backup System from No Authentication or User Authentication mode to AD mode, it may be necessary to log out and back into Windows client before it is possible to access the shares.

Leaving an AD Domain

The user may wish to Leave and AD domain in order to:

•Temporarily Leave then Rejoin the same domain
- Join a different AD Domain
- Put the StoreOnce Backup System into either No Authentication or Local User Authentication modes.

If you need to leave then rejoin the domain, use the Leave AD option on the NAS—CIFS Server

Web Management Interface; you can then rejoin the same domain. If joining a different AD domo or changing mode, select the Edit button on the page and select the new domain or mode.

In either case you will first be prompted to provide credentials of a user with authority to leave the domain. If incorrect credentials are supplied the StoreOnce Backup System will reconfigure its own authentication mode, but will not correctly inform the domain controller that the computer has left the domain.

Configuring NAS shares for NFS

HP StoreOnce Backup Systems provide an NFS interface that allows you to configure the HP StoreOnce Backup System with NFS file shares as target for backups from UNIX and Linux servers. There are two configuration stages when creating a file share that UNIX and Linux users can acc both are stages implemented from the Web Management Interface:

•Create a list of NFS hosts that can mount the NFS shares
- Create NFS NAS shares on the StoreOnce Backup System and specify access permissions for list of hosts

Specifying NFS hosts

  1. Log on to the Web Management Interface for the appliance.
  2. Select NAS.
  3. Select the NFS Server tab.

Shares CIFS Server NFS Server NFS Server Server Name D2D-MX0011098W Host List Host Name Description * Allow any host Delete Edit Add

  1. Click Add and provide a Host Name and Description. Click Update.

Shares CIFS Server NFS Server Server Name D20-MXQ011096W Host List Host Name Description Allow any host Cancel Update

NOTE: A host with the '*' wildcard is added by default, which will allow any host to access a share.

Creating an NFS share

  1. Log on to the Web Management Interface for the appliance.
  2. Select NAS and display the Shares tab. This tab is used to manage all shares: for both CIFS and NFS servers.
  3. Click Create Share.
  4. Provide the following information:

• Name: the name that will be used to identify the share in Windows
•Description: a text description of the share (optional)
•Access Protocol: Select NFS

The Network Path is either /nas/ or /nas/.

There is also an option to enable Write Protection. This should only be used if you want to prevent further backup to the share. If you enable it, any backup jobs currently using that share will fail.

  1. Now select the Permissions tab and set the access permissions for that share for each host in the list. Check the appropriate box: Read/Write Access, Read-Only Access or No Access.

Shares CIFS Server NFS Server Shares File shares created on the D2D Backup System are intended to be used as targets for backup applications. They should not be used as general purpose storage or for drag-and-drop backups, doing so will result in lower deduplication efficiency and performance. Name Role Status Access Protocol User Data Stored Size On Disk Created Last Modified Share9 Non Replicating Online CFS - - 9:46 2010/06/16 9:46 2010/06/16 Create Share Share10 Share Permissions Access Protocol NFS Host Name Care Write Access Read Only Access No Access * ○ ○ ○ Hyderabad ○ ○ ○ Cancel Create

  1. Click Update.

Shares CFS Server NFS Server Shares File shares created on the D2D Backup System are intended to be used as targets for backup applications. They should not be used as general purpose storage or for drag-and-drop backups, doing so will result in lower deduplication efficiency and performance. Name Role Status Access Protocol User Data Stored Size On Disk Created Last Modified Share9 Non Replicating Online CFS 9:46 2010/06/16 9:46 2010/06/16 Create Share Share10 Share Permissions Name Share10 Description HP D2D Share 10 Access Protocol NFS Write Protection Cancel Create

  1. The share is now available as a network drive to be mounted from a UNIX or Linux server so that it may be a target for the backup application.

NOTE: The share is not optimized for general purpose file storage. The HP StoreOnce Backup System is a NAS deduplicating appliance that is optimized for backup.

Connecting to the NAS share on UNIX or Linux

To access the NAS share from a UNIX or Linux server on the network, use the mount command. The actual syntax of the command depends upon which operating system you are using.

NOTE: See the Linux and UNIX Configuration Guide for more detailed information.

Problems connecting

The following sequence will cause problems when connecting to a NFS share.

  1. Create an NFS share and mount it on a Linux box.
  2. Delete the share on the StoreOnce Backup System without unmounting it from the Linux box.
  3. Recreate the share again with the same name.

In this scenario, the Linux client will assign a new set of inodes to the new share, but when trying to access the old mount point it will use the previous set of inodes and will therefore not manage to connect.

Reboot the host Linux system and the connection will work again.

NOTE: If the StoreOnce D2D Backup system detects a possibly issue with data integrity for a Share it will immediately set the status of that device to 'failed-to-start' or 'read-only', this is to minimize the possibility of any further potential corruption being introduced on the device. If a device enters one of these states it is reported on the GUI and selecting that device will give you some options to attempt to restore the device to a working state. For more details see Recovering devices that have failed to start or have become read-only (page 132).

5 Appliance Configuration

The Configuration menu allows you to configure the appliance's network and interface settings and set up email alerts. The following options are available.

•Network (Configuration)
•Fibre Channel (Configuration)
- iSCSI (Configuration)
•SNMP (Configuration)
- Email Alerts (Configuration)

Network (Configuration)

This page is used to view and edit network settings. It is also used to turn Beacon Mode on off.

NOTE: HP D2D4300 Series only: It is possible to turn off the 1Gb port without switching on the 10Gb port. For this reason a warning is always displayed when you change the network setti The following screen shot is taken from an HP D2D4300 Series model.

D2D-CZJ9340854 : 192.168.1.101 Network Fibre Channel ISCSI SNMP Email Alerts Network settings Network Mode: 1Gb Single Port Network Mode: 10Gb Disabled Network Name D2D-CZJ9340854 Default Gateway 192.168.1.1 DNS Address 1 0.0.0.0 DNS Address 2 0.0.0.0 DNS Address 3 0.0.0.0 Port Settings: 1Gb 1G Port 3 DHCP IP Address 192.168.1.101 Subnet Mask 255.255.0.0 Domain Name gbr.hp.com IPV6 Address fe80::225:b3ff.fea:a762/64 Port Settings: 10Gb 10Gb Ports Disabled Turn Beacon On Edit

Network configuration

The details in this section reflect the IP settings that were specified during installation. The HP StoreOnce Backup System supports DHCP for IPv4 networks and this is turned on by default.

NOTE: NetBIOS name resolution is not supported on CIFS shares.

You may need to edit the details if there is a conflict in the IP address, or you move the host to different network node. Be aware that any changes you make to the network settings could affect how you connect again to the HP StoreOnce Backup System. For example, if you change the IP address, you must use the new address to log in from a web browser.

1Gb and 10Gb ports (HP D2D4300 Series only)

The HP D2D4300 Series has two 1Gb ports and two 10Gb ports. You must connect to the 1Gb port (labeled LAN port 3) to run the Installation Wizard and discover the HP StoreOnce Backup System on your network. This is also the recommended port for running the Web Management Interface.

The 10Gb ports are available for backup and replication traffic. Take care if configuring with DHCP because the HP StoreOnce Backup System supports only one gateway address. If 1Gb and 10Gb networks are configured on the same domain and backup and replication traffic seems to be slow, make sure that the hosts are configured appropriately to select the 10Gb network for data transfer.

To edit network settings

Procedure 3

  1. Click Edit to make the details editable.
  2. Make the required changes and click Update.
  3. You must now reconnect to the HP StoreOnce Backup System using the new settings.

- If you have changed the IP address, you must use the new address to log in from a web browser.

- You may also need to edit the iSCSI Initiator on all hosts that are connected to the HP StoreOnce Backup System, if you change the IP address. See also the HP StoreOnce Backup System Installation and Configuration Guide.

Table 7 Network parameters

Network Mode:This is where you define the 1Gb network mode, which may be single port, dual port, high availability (port failover) or high availability (link aggregation). The selection you make determines the number of network port tabs in the lower half of this page and the ports available on the Devices page. See the HP StoreOnce Backup System Installation and Configuration Guide for more information about configuring network modes.HP D2D4300 Series: The 10Gb network mode is disabled by default. If you are using the 10Gb port(s) to transfer data, you must first enable the port in the Port Settings 10Gb section of this page.
Network Name:This is the name of the HP StoreOnce Backup System. You can use the network name, instead of the IP address, to log on to the Web Management Interface.
Use DHCP Gateway:This option is available if any port is configured for DHCP. Check this box to select the DHCP allocated Gateway IP address rather than the Default Gateway.
Default Gateway:This is the node that connects the HP StoreOnce Backup System to the network that is servicing the web pages. (Static IP addressing only.) A default gateway is required if all ports are configured as static, or Use DHCP Gateway is not enabled. The gateway must reside in one of the subnets.
DNS Server Name 1/2/3:These are the DNS IP addresses. When using DHCP these may be obtained automatically.Ask your network administrator to advise what you should enter.

More about the default gateway

If any network port (1Gb or 10Gb) is set to DHCP the Use DHCP Gateway checkbox is displayed.

If you do not want to enable this setting, you must enter the specific settings for the Default (

Network Fibre Channel iSCSI SNMP Email Alerts Network settings Network Mode: 1Gb Single Port Network Mode: 10Gb Single Port Network Name Haborn27 Use DHCP Gateway Default Gateway 16.28.128.1 DNS Address 1 16.110.135.51 DNS Address 2 16.110.135.52 DNS Address 3 0.0.0.0 Port Settings: 1Gb 1G Port 3 DHCP IP Address 16.28.131.62 Subnet Mask 255.255.248.0 Domain Name gbr.hp.com IPV6 Address 2620 0:a17:e020 225:b31f feaa 8802/64 Port Settings: 10Gb 10G Port 1 DHCP DHCP Domain Override

Table 8 Port Settings 1GB

DHCP:Check or uncheck the box to enable or disable this feature. If DHCP is turned off, you must manually specify all the network settings for the HP StoreOnce Backup System. If DHCP is turned on, the majority of the network settings are obtained automatically. However, even when DHCP is on, the Network Name must be specified. Other parameters, such as Doma Name and DNS Server Address, become optional. You can override the automatic settings and enter your own values, if required, but this is not usually necessary.
IP Address:This is the IP address for the device. The HP StoreOnce Backup System supports both dyna (DHCP) and static IP addressing. The IP Address must be unique on the network. If you are using static IP addressing, you must also provide the subnet mask, default gateway and, optionally, domain name.
Subnet Mask:This determines the subnet to which the IP address belongs. (Static IP addressing only.)
Domain Name:This is the group of devices on the network to which the HP StoreOnce Backup System belongs. (Static IP addressing only.)

Table 9 Port Settings 10Gb (HP D2D4300 Series only)

10Gb Ports Disabled:This is the default setting. When you enable it, the settings are the same as those displayed for the 1Gb ports.
Other settings:Once you enable 10Gb ports you can edit the same fields as you would for the see previous table.

Resetting network settings and Web Management Interface password

There are some conditions in which a previously configured device may fail to be discovered a network and, therefore, may be unreachable if the network parameters are invalid for the net to which the device is attached. In this case, it may be necessary to reset the networking parameters and device name to factory defaults.

  1. Ensure that there are no backup or restore jobs in progress to the device.

  2. Press the Power On button on the front of the HP StoreOnce Backup System three times in quick succession to reset it.

After approximately 5 seconds, the HP StoreOnce Backup System will begin its reboot sequence.

NOTE: The HP StoreOnce Backup System will be reset to factory networking settings and the Administrator password will be reset to Admin. No user data will be lost. Network configuration defaults to Single Port configuration, so you may need to edit the settings on this page.

  1. After the reboot, the device will be in DHCP mode and also available for discovery using the Installation wizard provided on the StoreOnce CD.

Beacon mode

Beacon mode flashes the LEDs on the HP StoreOnce Backup System. It is useful if you have several HP StoreOnce Backup Systems on your network and want to confirm which unit is being configured

  • Click Turn Beacon On to activate beacon mode.
    • If you do not switch off Beacon Mode from the Network page, it will continue for 5 minutes.

Fibre Channel (Configuration)

This page allows you to view and edit Fibre Channel SAN settings, if necessary. It shows FC settings for each port on the FC card.

Network Fibre Channel iSCSI Email Alerts Fibre Channel Settings Port Speed Topology Port 1 Auto (default) N_Port (default)(requires Switch Port to support NPIV) Port 2 Auto (default) N_Port (default)(requires Switch Port to support NPIV) Edit

To edit the FC configuration

Click Edit to make the fields editable for each port. Make the required changes and click Update.

- Speed: The default is Auto, which is the recommended option. For users who wish to fix the speed, other available values are:

- HP D2D4300 Series: 8Gbs (preferred), 4Gbs or 2Gbs (not recommended)

° HP D2D4100 Series: 4Gbs (preferred), 2Gbs or1Gbs (not recommended)

- Topology: The default is Auto, which is the recommended option. Loop, where the HP StoreOnce Backup System simulates a large number of FC devices, and N_Port, when a single target device creates many virtual devices on a fabric attach port, are also supported. N_Port requires the switch port to support NPIV (N_Port ID Virtualisation).

iSCSI (Configuration)

By default, a new library is automatically created whenever a new server first connects to the HP StoreOnce Backup System using the iSCSI initiator. Use this page, if you want to disable this feature.

Network Filters Channel iSCSI Email Alerts iSCSI Settings Auto Connection Enabled Edit

SNMP (Configuration)

This feature provides an HP StoreOnce Backup System with the ability to act as a Network EI in an SNMP network so that it can communicate effectively with Network Management Stations using SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol). You use the SNMP tab to enable this feed and configure various settings, as described below.

The StoreOnce implementation of SNMP is compatible with and has been tested with HP System Insight Manager (HP-SIM).

D2D Backup System Home Virtual Tape Devices Configuration Status Replication Administration D2D-CZJ9340844 : IPV4 16.26.138.202 : PV6 2620:0 a17:e021:225:b3ff.fea8:9c0e64 Status Network Fibre Channel i$CSI SNMP Email Alerts Status Status Starting SNMP System Name D2D-CZJ9340844 SNMP Enabled ✓ System Information System Location Unknown System Contact Unknown Authentication Read Community public Write Community - Traps Trap Events Alerts and Information Community String public Edit Destinations Address Description There are no SNMP Destinations configured Remove Edit Add

Procedure 4

  1. To enable SNMP, click on Edit and check the SNMP Enabled box.
  2. Make any changes to the default parameters, as appropriate. See also SNMP parameters (page 38).
  3. Click Add in the Destinations section to specify the IP Address(es) of the SNMP management host(s) that will be monitoring the HP StoreOnce Backup System. If you do not specify any destinations, events will be reported to everybody on the network. (To remove an SNMP h simply select its IP address and click Remove.)

Network Flire Channel ISC$1 Email Alerts SNMP Status Status System Name SNMP Enabled OK D2DOUPRC01 System Information System Location System Contact HP item.blogspot@hp.com Authentication Read Community write Community public Traps Trap Events Community String Alerts somestr Destinations 16.25.13.7 16.25.130.43 16.20.130.41 16.25.130.91 16.6 Cancel Remove Add Update

4. Click Update to apply the parameters.

Table 10 SNMP parameters

Status
Status:When the SNMP feature is enabled, it reports the overall system status as reflected on the Summary page of the Web Management interface, as follows:OK - System status is good.Warning - Something on the system needs attention, but is not critical.Critical - Something on the system needs immediate attention.It also reports any software status messages or hardware status messages, as reported in the event log and email alerts or the Web Management Interface.
This is the network name of the StoreOnce Backup System.System Name:
Check this box to enable SNMP. The default state is disabled.SNMP enabled:
System Information
System Location:This is the physical location of the HP StoreOnce Backup System. A maximum of 20 characters is allowed.
System Contact:This is contact information for the system administrator, which may be a name, email address or phone number. A maximum of 20 characters is allowed.
Authorization
Read Community:This defines the SNMP Read Community string. The default is 'public'. If you want to restrict read access, enter a string of up to 20 characters. This string acts as a password for Read access and must be manually configured in the management application so that it can access events (see HP Systems Insight Manager (page 39)).
Write Community:This is not currently supported. Network Management Stations are not able to write any data to the HP StoreOnce Backup System.
Traps
Trap Events:This defines which events are reported. The default is none, but this may be reset to:Alerts (reports only alert events)Information (reports only information events)Both (reports both alerts and information events)
Community String:This should be the same as the Read Community and defaults to 'Public'. Only change it, if you change the Read Community string.
Destinations: It is advised that these are set to point the appropriate HP SIM management server with to ensure the notification of alerts and information events.
Address:This is the IP Address of the SNMP management host(s) that will be monitoring the HP StoreOnce Backup System. For example, an address entered would be that of the HP-SIM management server. Up to 16 destination addresses may be configured.
This is a description of the destination management host.Description:

HP Systems Insight Manager

The MIBs, Management Information Bases, used to represent the information handled by the HF StoreOnce Backup System are called SEMI-MIB.mib and TRAP-DESTINATIONS-MIB.mib and are included on the CD supplied with your product (they can also be downloaded from http://www.hp.com/support). These databases must be compiled and registered with HP Systems Insig Manager, so that information from the StoreOnce Backup System can be transmitted to and interpreted by the management host.

There are three stages to setting up HP Systems Insight Manager for use with the HP StoreOn Backup System:

  1. Register SEMI-MIB.mib and TRAP-DESTINATION-MIB within the base of MIBs supported by HP Systems Insight Manager.
  2. Update the existing system type database with the new system type for the HP StoreOnce Backup System, based on the unique system object identifier.
  3. Discover the HP StoreOnce Backup System under HP Systems Insight Manager

NOTE: For detailed instructions on working with HP-SIM, refer to the "HP Systems Insight Manager Technical Reference Guide".

Register the MIB for the HP StoreOnce Backup System

  1. Log on to the HP Systems Insight Manager.
  2. Compile SEMI-MIB.
    Open a Command window and go to Program Files\HP\Systemins Insight Manager\ mibs. Enter the command mcompile SEMI-MIB.mib.

  3. Register SEMI-MIB.

Still in the Command window, enter the command mxmib -a SEMI-MIB.cfg.

  1. Compile TRAP-DESTINATIONS-MIB.

Open a Command window and go to Program Files\HP\Systemins Insight Manager\ mibs. Enter the command mcompile TRAP-DESTINATIONS-MIB.mib.

  1. Register TRAP-DESTINATIONS-MIB.

Still in the Command window, enter the command mxmib -a TRAP-DESTINATIONS-MIB.cfg.

  1. Log out from the HP System Insight Manager and then log back in again.

  2. You can check that SEMI-MIB and TRAP-DESTINATIONS-MIB have been registered with HP System Insight Manager by selecting Options — Events — SNMP Trap Settings... on the HP-SIM Home page.

  3. Scroll down the list of available MIBs to locate SEMI-MIB and TRAP-DESTINATIONS-MIB.

Systems Insight Manager User Administrator Home 1204.04 System Status Legend... Customize... Updated: Non_11/23/2008, 11:42 AM VET 0 0 0 0 Unclear/Event Status Search Advanced Search... Tool Search SNMP Trap Settings View and edit user modifiable attributes associated with traps. Mb Name: asmb.mb Trap Name: rasenter.mb Event Type: rasent.mb Description: rasport.mb risavocmb risavoca.mb dd-disco-chassis.mb dd-disco-Flash.mb dd-discos-verfaces.mb dd-disco-up.mb dd-disco-sys.mb Enable Trap Handleings: ds-disco-ftp.mb Category: cys-v2.mb Severity: potend.mb pic.mb rfcl 210.mb rfcl 215.mb rfcl 514.mb mac-mib.mb SEM-MB.mb sagagent.mb svyou.mb svchon.mb synbrap.mb tructu.mb vcd-smp-mib.mb v5_Offcom.mb v5_the.mb v5_Taw.mb OK

Update the system type database

  1. Log on to HP System Insight Manager, if not already logged on.
  2. Select Options — Manage System Types... on the Home page to display a list of all managed system types.
  3. Click on New... to add a new system type.
  4. Define a new rule filling only required fields. as follows:

•System object identifier: 1.3.6.1.4.1.11.10.3.1.3.27
• Compare rule: match
•Priority: 1 (highest)
•System type: Storage Device
•Product Model: HP StorageWorks D2D

Systems Insight Manager User: ono/gray/box Home: 1 Box Cut System Status Legend... Customize... Updated: Sel, 11/01/2009, 0:30 PM / MET 409.16.13 2009 Undeared Event Status Search Advanced Search... Tool Search... System and Event Collections All Systems All Events Systems Private Shared Systems by Type All Systems All Servers HP BladeSystem Storage Systems All Racks All Enclosures All Clients All Networking Devices All Printers All Management Processors All Virtual Connect Domains Systems by Status Systems by Operating System Clusters by Type Clusters by Status System Functions Events Private Shared Events by Severity Sign-In Events Service Events Events by Time Tools Display Configure Diagnose Reports Tasks & Logs Options Help Manage System Types Create and manage rules to identify third party SNMP managed systems. New rule: Required field * Use the following criteria to create a new system type. System object identifier: 1.3.5.1.4.1.11.10.3.1.3.27 Retrieve from system... Compare rule * MB variable object identifier: Retrieve from MBL... Object value: Retrieve from system... Data type: string Comparison rule: any value Priority (1 is highest): 1 Assign the following properties to systems identified by the above criteria. System type: Storage Device Switchp: None Product model: IP Storage/Vorks I/O Custom management page: Launch OK Cancel

  1. Click OK. The HP StoreOnce Backup System will now be included as a product within the pool of managed system types. (Select Storage Device from the System Type drop-down menu to check this.)

Discover the HP StoreOnce Backup System

NOTE: Always set up the SNMP page on the Web Management Interface before discovering the HP StoreOnce Backup System on HP-SIM.

  1. Log on to HP System Insight Manager, if not already logged on.
  2. Select Options — Discovery... on the Home page to display a list of systems that have already been discovered.
  3. Click Edit... to configure the discovery rule for the HP StoreOnce Backup System
  4. Place a single IP or a range of IP addresses to discover the new machine(s) in Ping inclusion ranges...

Systems Insight Manager User: Administrator Home: Scan Out System Status Legend: Customize Updated: Tue, 11/24/2009, 11:35 AM VIET 0 0 0 Undirected Event Status Search Search Advanced Search Tool Search System and Event Collections Customize All Systems All Events Systems Private Shared Systems by Type All Systems All Servers HP Bladesystem Storage Systems All Racks All Enclosures All Clients All Networking Devices All Printers All Management Process All Virtual Connect Doms Systems by Status Systems by Operating Syst Clusters by Type Clusters by Status System Functions Events Tools Deploy Configure Disagree Reports Tasks & Logs Options Help Discovery View status and results of task instances. Edit Discovery: System Automatic Discovery Required field * Name: * System Automatic Discovery Schedule: Automatically executo discovery every. 100% 1:100 AM Ping Inclusion ranges, system (hosts) names, and/or hosts files Help with syntax... 6.26.10.47 Comments: Credentidale... Configure/Repack... Save Cancel

  1. Click Credentials..., select the SNMP tab and type in the Read community string. This should be the same as the Read Community string on the SNMP page of the Web Management Interface. If you are using the default setting that allows everyone on the network to read the reported alerts, enter "public". Click OK to confirm.

Tools Deploy Configure Diagnosis Reports Tasks & Logs Options Help Discovery View status and results at best instances Browse Credentials... Configure/Repair... Save Cancel Sign In SNMP Show advanced protocol credentials SNMP Credentials: System Automatic Discovery Use these credentials Read community string: public Delete Add If these credentials fail, try others that may spely. This may impact performance. Learn more... OK

  1. Click Save to save the discovery rule.

  2. To start the discovery process click Run Now.

Tools Display Configure Diagnose Reports Tasks & Logs Options Help Discovery Indicate the systems you want HP Systems height Manager to manage. Maximize Configure end run automatic system discovery. Be sure to configure the settings prior to executing automatic discovery for the most accurate information. For all automatic discoveries: Configure general settings Manage hosts files Configure global credentials Configure global protocol settings Name Last Run Schedule Comments System Automatic Discovery Never Task is Disabled - Periodic Edit... Enable Delete... View Task Results... Run Now New...

NOTE: If a firewall is in operation on the machine running HP Systems Insight Manager, make sure the HP StoreOnce Backup System(s) are within the firewall.

  1. The discovery process adds new machine(s) to the collection of managed systems. To locate the HP StoreOnce Backup System, enter its IP address in the Search box in the left-hand and click Search.

System Status Legend: Customize Update Tue, 11/24/2008, 11:41 AM/ET 0 0 0 Uncleared Event Status Search 16.26.10.47 Advanced Search... Tool Search... System and Event Collections All Systems All Events Systems Private Shared Systems by Type Tools Deploy Configure Diagnostics Optimize Reports Tasks & Logs Options Help Search Results Search for matches in system name and common system attributes Search again 16.26.10.47 in common system attributes Auto: Searching using "common system attributes" can be time-consuming if there is a large number of systems. View Advanced... See As Collection... View matches for "16.26.10.47" in common system attributes Quick Launch... Summary 0 Critical 0 Major 0 Minor Normal Disabled Unknown Total 1 HS MP SW ES System Name + System Type System Address Product Name OS Name 1 16.26.10.47 Storage Devices 16.26.10.47 HP StorageWorks D20 Delete Print

NOTE: If the discovery process fails, check that the network is working correctly and that the HP StoreOnce Backup System is online.

Email Alerts (Configuration)

This page is used to set up details of the email servers that will be used to route messages of the HP StoreOnce Backup System and to specify up to eight email recipients. Messages are generated if a disk fails or reaches its threshold capacity, if the system reboots, if there are no problems or if there is a critical hardware failure.

The HP StoreOnce Backup System uses Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP), which is the established standard for transferring mail over the internet. Microsoft Exchange has a virtual SN server available which can be used to receive these emails and forward onward if necessary. UNIX and Linux operating systems have a Sendmail program included. Sendmail uses the SMTP protocol to receive and, if necessary, forward e-mail messages.

To configure email settings, the HP StoreOnce Backup System must be on the same network as SMTP server that it can use.

  • Click Edit to make the fields editable. Make changes, as appropriate and click Update.
  • Once you have created a recipient's email address, use the Test button to make sure emails can be sent successfully.

Network Fibre Channel ©CSI Email Alerts Email Account Settings SMTP Server Sender's Email Account SMTP Username (Optional) SMTP Password (Optional) Email Recipient Settings Email Recipient Enabled Email Address Test Recipient's email 1 ✓ Recipient's email 2 ✓ Recipient's email 3 ✓ Recipient's email 4 ✓ Recipient's email 5 ✓ Recipient's email 6 ✓ Recipient's email 7 ✓ Recipient's email 8 ✓ Edit

Table 11 Email parameters

This is the IP address of the email server.SMTP Server:
Username and Password:Some email servers require authentication to send email alerts. If required, enter a Usernam and a Password here that are valid on the SMTP server entered in the previous box.
Sender's Email AccountThis is the email account to which the email will be attributed in the recipient's inbox. The account must exist on the email server. For example, you may like to create an account called "MyD2D@MyServer.com".
Recipient's Email Address 1/2/3../8:This is the email address of the person who should receive the message. Up to eight email addresses may be specified. You may only enter one address per line. Once you have configured an email recipient, there is a Test button that you can use to send a test email to the specified address.

To configure Microsoft Exchange Server

NOTE: Please refer to the Linux and UNIX Configuration Guide on the CD-ROM for information about configuring SMTP with UNIX and Linux.

It is important to check the SMTP server's security configuration parameters to ensure that the Sender's Email Account can be recognized. Security configuration parameters are found within the SMTP virtual server's property pages. To view or modify them:

  1. Open the Exchange Management console.
  2. Click on Servers and then the server you wish to configure.
  3. Click on Protocols and then SMTP.
  4. You will see the default virtual SMTP server. Right click on this and select Properties.
  5. Select the Access Control tab and then select Authentication.

Authentication Select acceptable authentication methods for this resource. ✓ Anonymous access No user name or password required. ☐ Resolve anonymous e-mail ☐ Basic authentication (password is sent in clear text) ☐ Requires ILS encryption Default domain: ☐ Integrated Windows Authentication The client and server negotiate the Windows Security Support Provider Interface. Grant or deny submit permissions to specific users or groups. Users... OK Cancel Help

  1. The HP StoreOnce Backup System may be used with one of the following settings:

  2. Anonymous Authentication (anyone can log on, you do not need to provide a Username and Password when you configure email alerts)

  3. Basic Authentication, where a user name and password are required and should be provided when you configure email alerts

NOTE: Integrated Windows Authentication is not supported with the HP StoreOnce Backup System. If your SMTP Server requires this form of authentication and you have a spare net port, we recommend that you create a new virtual SMTP server, allowing connection only the HP StoreOnce Backup System. In this instance, you may lock the SMTP server to use the HP StoreOnce Backup System's IP address and authentication may safely be set to anonymous for the dedicated SMTP server.

6 Status

The Status menu allows you to monitor system activity and the health of storage elements and network connections/interfaces. The following options are available.

•System Activity (Status)
•Storage (Status), HP D2D4100 and 4300 Series only
•Disk (Status), HP D2D2500 Series only
•RAID (Status), HP D2D2500 Series only
• Network (Status)
•iSCSI (Status)
•Fibre Channel (Status)
•Storage Reporting (Status)
- Log (Status)

System Activity (Status)

This tab displays two graphs that illustrate system activity. These graphs show Virtual Tape and NAS throughput, which illustrates current backup activity, and current replication throughput.

These graphs are updated every 5 seconds and provide useful feedback about the activity on the HP StoreOnce Backup System.

See the D2D Best Practices for VTL, NAS and Replication implementations for more information about using these graphs in conjunction with other information to decide whether it may be necessary to take action to improve performance and what action may be appropriate.

HP StoreOnce G2 - System Activity (Status) - 1

line | Time (Minutes) | Throughput (MB/sec) - Virtual Tape Read | Throughput (MB/sec) - Virtual Tape Write | Throughput (MB/sec) - NAS Read | Throughput (MB/sec) - NAG Write | Data Job Inbound Throughput | Data Job Outbound Throughput | | -------------- | ---------------------------------------- | ----------------------------------------- | ------------------------------ | ------------------------------- | ---------------------------- | ----------------------------- | | -6.00 | ~0.5 | ~0.3 | ~0.1 | ~0.2 | ~0.8 | ~0.6 | | -4.00 | ~1.2 | ~0.9 | ~0.4 | ~0.7 | ~1.5 | ~1.2 | | -2.00 | ~0.8 | ~0.6 | ~0.2 | ~0.5 | ~1.2 | ~1.0 | | -1.00 | ~1.5 | ~1.1 | ~0.6 | ~0.9 | ~1.8 | ~1.5 | | 0 | ~0.3 | ~0.2 | ~0.1 | ~0.3 | ~0.9 | ~0.8 | | 1 | ~1.8 | ~1.4 | ~0.5 | ~0.8 | ~1.6 | ~1.4 | | 2 | ~0.7 | ~0.5 | ~0.2 | ~0.4 | ~1.1 | ~1.0 | | 3 | ~1.4 | ~1.1 | ~0.6 | ~0.9 | ~1.7 | ~1.5 | | 4 | ~0.9 | ~0.7 | ~0.3 | ~0.5 | ~1.3 | ~1.2 | | 5 | ~1.6 | ~1.3 | ~0.7 | ~0.8 | ~1.9 | ~1.7 | | 6 | ~0.6 | ~0.5 | ~0.2 | ~0.4 | ~1.0 | ~0.9 | | 7 | ~1.3 | ~1.1 | ~0.5 | ~0.7 | ~1.5 | ~1.3 | | 8 | ~0.8 | ~0.6 | ~0.3 | ~0.5 | ~1.2 | ~1.1 | | 9 | ~1.7 | ~1.4 | ~0.7 | ~0.9 | ~1.8 | ~1.6 | | 10 | ~0.7 | ~0.5 | ~0.2 | ~0.4 | ~1.1 | ~1.0 | | 11 | ~1.4 | ~1.1 | ~0.6 | ~0.8 | ~1.6 | ~1.4 | | 12 | ~0.9 | ~0.7 | ~0.3 | ~0.5 | ~1.3 | ~1.2 | | 13 | ~1.5 | ~1.2 | ~0.7 | ~0.9 | ~1.9 | ~1.7 | | 14 | ~0.8 | ~0.6 | ~0.2 | ~0.4 | ~1.0 | ~0.9 | | 15 | ~1.3 | ~1.1 | ~0.5 | ~0.8 | ~1.5 | ~1.3 | | 16 | ~0.7 | ~0.5 | ~0.3 | ~0.5 | ~1.2 | ~1.1 | | 17 | ~1.6 | ~1.3 | ~0.7 | ~0.9 | ~1.8 | ~1.6 | | 18 | ~0.9 | ~0.7 | ~0.2 | ~0.4 | ~1.1 | ~1.0 | | 19 | ~1.4 | ~1.1 | ~0.6 | ~0.8 | ~1.6 | ~1.4 | | 20 | ~0.8 | ~0.5 | ~0.3 | ~0.5 | ~1.3 | ~1.2 | | 21 | ~1.3 | ~1.2 | ~0.7 | ~0.9 | ~1.9 | ~1.7 | | 22 | ~0.7 | ~0.6 | ~0.2 | ~0.4 | ~1.0 | ~0.9 | | 23 | ~1.5 | ~1.3 | ~0.6 | ~0.8 | ~1.5 | ~1.3 | | 24 | ~0.9 | ~0.7 | ~0.3 | ~0.5 | ~1.2 | ~1.1 | | 25 | ~1.2 | ~1.4 | ~0.7 | ~0.9 | ~1.7 | ~1.5 | | 26 | ~0.8 | ~0.6 | ~0.2 | ~0.4 | ~1.3 | ~1.2 | | 27 | ~1.4 | ~1.1 | ~0.6 | ~0.8 | ~1.9 | ~1.7 | | 28 | ~0.7 | ~0.5 | ~0.3 | ~0.5 | ~1.0 | ~0.9 | | 29 | ~1.3 | ~1.2 | ~0.7 | ~0.9 | ~1.5 | ~1.3 | | 30 | ~0.9 | ~0.7 | ~0.2 | ~0.4 | ~1.2 | ~1.1 | | 31 | ~1.5 | ~1.3 | ~0.6 | ~0.8 | ~1.8 | ~1.6 | | 32 | ~0.8 | ~0.6 | ~0.3 | ~0.5 | ~1.3 | ~1.2 | | 33 | ~1.2 | ~1.4 | ~0.7 | ~0.9 | ~1.9 | ~1.7 | | 34 | ~0.7 | ~0.5 | ~0.2 | ~0.4 | ~1.0 | ~0.9 | | 35 | (~-5) | (~-4) | (~-3) | (~-2) | (~-3) | (~-2) | | 36 | (~-4) | (~-3) | (~-2) | (~-1) | (~-2) | (~-1) | | 37 | (~-3) | (~-2) | (~-1) | (~-2) | (~-3) | (~-2) | | 38 | (~-2) | (~-1) | (~-2) | (~-3) | (~-2) | (~-3) | | 39 | (~-3) | (~-2) | (~-3) | (~-4) | (~-3) | (~-4) | | 40 | (~-4) | (~-3) | (~-4) | (~-5) | (~-4) | (~-5) | | 41 | (~-5) | (~-4) | (~-5) | (~-6) | (~-5) | (~-6) | | 42 | (~-6) | (~-5) | (~-6) | (~-7) | (~-6) | (~-7) | | 43 | (~-7) | (~-6) | (~-7) | (~-8) | (~-7) | (~-8) | | 44 | (~-8) | (~-7) | (~-8) | (~-9) | (~-8) | (~-9) | | 45 | (~-9) | (~-8) | (~-9) | (~-10) | (~-9) | (~-10) | | 46 | (~-8) | (~-9) | (~-8) | (~-9) | (~-8) | (~-9) | | 47 | (~-7) | (~-8) | (~-7) | (~-8) | (~-7) | (~-8) | | 48 | (~-6) | (~-7) | (~-6) | (~-7) | (~-6) | (~-7) | | 49 | (~-5) | (~-6) | (~-5) | (~-6) | (~-5) | (~-6) | | 50 | (~-4) | (~-5) | (~-4) | (~-5) | (~-4) | (~-5) | | 51 | (~-3) | (~-4) | (~-3) | (~-4) | (~-3) | (~-4) | | 52 | (~-2) | (~-3) | (~-2) | (~-3) | (~-2) | (~-3) | | 53 (~-2) (~-2) (~-2) (~-2) (~-2) (~-2) (~-2) | | 54 (~+2) (~+2) (~+2) (~+2) (~+2) (~+2) (~+2) | | 55 (~+3) (~+3) (~+3) (~+3) (~+3) (~+3) (~+3) | | 56 (~+4) (~+4) (~+4) (~+4) (~+4) (~+4) (~+4) | | 57 (~+5) (~+5) (~+5) (~+5) (~+5) (~+5) (~+5) | | 58 (~+6) (~+6) (~+6) (~+6) (~+6) (~+6) (~+6) | | 59 (~+7) (~+7) (~+7) (~+7) (~+7) (~+7) (~+7) | | 60 --> (Note: Two values are not explicitly provided in the code.) ) . The actual values may vary based on the data source and the type of data source in the chart format (e.g., “Throughput” or “Data Job Inbound”). The data is generated using a random number generator for each data source and the corresponding data source value for each data source value (e.g., “Throughput” or “Data Job Inbound”). The data is presented in a CSV format as shown above and below the table.

Storage (Status)

This page contains four tabs that provides information about the Storage Pool, Disks, RAID and Shelves for HPD2D4100 and HP D2D4300 Series Backup Systems.

NOTE: This page is not displayed with HP D2D2500 Series Backup Systems.

Shelf is used as a term within the Web Management Interface to identify the physical storage space provided by the HP StoreOnce Backup System (Internal shelf for HP D2D4300 Series and Shelf for HP D2D4100 Series) and the optional Capacity Upgrade Kit (Shelf 1 for HP D2D4100 Se for HP D2D4300 Series these shelves are identified by the card slot and port on the RAID cc which the shelf is attached). Each shelf contains 12 physical disks, but one of the disks is an spare disk. If one of the other disks on that shelf fails, the online spare disk will be immediat used to replace it. The RAID rebuild process occurs automatically. The failed disk should be rep a soon as possible.

The Storage Pool refers to the overall storage space available on the HP StoreOnce Backup System to hosts for storing data. It consists of shelves and disks. Two fields are displayed at the top each of the three tabs.

• Storage Pool Status: This is a summary of the overall health of the storage and RAID
• Storage Manager Status: This is the most recent message reported by the Storage Management System

Storage pool tab

This tab shows the overall status of the Storage Pool, the number of shelves in the storage po and their configuration status. It is the tab that you use to add a shelf to the storage pool or Capacity Upgrade Kit has been physically installed. The following example shows the Storage Pool tab for an HP D2D4300 Series product.

D2D-MXQ011056W : 16 26:133.111 Storage Reporting Network ISCSI Storage Reporting Log Storage Storage Pool Status Storage Manager Status OK OK Storage Pool Disk RAID Shelbers Storage Pool Storage Pool Id Status Number of Shelves 1 OK 1 Discover Delete Configured Shelves Shelf Status Configuration State Disks Internal OK Configured 1+1 Create Add

Storage Pool

This section shows the overall status of the Storage Pool and the number of configured shelves in the storage pool. Storage pool information cannot be displayed if Storage Manager is busy, for example adding a shelf.

  • Click Discover to search for shelves and refresh the information on this page. This process will normally occur automatically.
  • Click Delete to return the Storage Pool to factory settings. This function is used only if the storage pool has failed. It should only be used, if advised to do so by HP Customer Support
Storage Pool ID:This is a unique ID. Currently, there is only one storage pool per HP StoreOnce Backup System.
Status:This shows the overall status of the storage pool. A warning message is displayed if a disk has failed and RAID is being rebuilt. You can tell which shelf the disk is on from the Configured Shelves section, but will need to check the Shelves page to find the exact location of the disk that has failed.
This shows the number of configured shelves in the storage pool.Number of Shelves:

Configured shelves

This section shows the status of the configured shelves and the number of disks. Shelf information cannot be displayed if Storage Manager is busy, for example adding a shelf.

Internal shelf identifies the disks within the HP D2D4312 Backup System. External shelves are identified by the card slot and port on the RAID card to which the shelf is attached.

0 shelf identifies the disks within the HP D2D4100 Series Backup System. External shelves are identified as 1.

- Click Add to add additional shelves to the storage pool RAID and expand the capacity of the HP StoreOnce Backup System. Refer to the Capacity Upgrade Kit Guide supplied with the expansion shelf for more information. This guide can also be downloaded from the HP web site.

IMPORTANT: HP StoreOnce systems that do not contain any data will complete the expansion process in around 5 minutes. Systems that already have data stored will take considerably longer and the time required to complete the expansion process will depend on the number of capacity upgrade shelves and the amount of data stored on the unit.

For example, an HP StoreOnce 4100 Series system running at close to full capacity will take up to 12 hours in most cases but an HP StoreOnce 4300 Series system running at close to full capacity (without any existing capacity upgrade) could take up to 48 hours, and potential take over 96 hours to complete with an existing capacity upgrade.

Please note that all devices remain offline during the expansion process. No backup, replication or tape attach scheduled jobs can occur and the process cannot be cancelled once started.

- Click Create to create a storage pool. This would only be necessary if you had deleted the storage pool and needed to recreate the environment.

Shelf:This is the shelf number. HP D2D4100Series: Shelf 0 is the HP StoreOnce Backup System; Shelf 1 is the Capacity Upgrade Kit, if installed.HP D2D4300 Series: This is the shelf name. Internal is the HP StoreOnce Backup System; external shelves are identified by the card slot and port on the RAID card to which the sh is attached. HP D2D4312 Backup systems may have up to 3 shelves.
Status:This is the status of the shelf. A warning message is displayed if a disk has failed and RA is being rebuilt. You will need to check the Shelves page to find the exact location of the disk that has failed.
Configuration State:This is the configuration status of the shelf. It is shown as not configured if it is not yet po of the storage pool.
Disks:This shows the number of disks per shelf. The first number refers to the number of disks in the RAID; the second number is the online spare, It is normally 11+1 but can change to show the number of active disks in use.

Disks tab

The tab provides information about total storage usage and the devices (libraries and NAS share making use of the StoreOnce Backup System. Use it to check how individual devices are using total storage space and when the total storage space is reaching capacity.

It also shows the deduplication ratio per library or share. This information is shown in the last column and is updated whenever data is written to disk.

System Activity Storage Network FSCM Reporting Log Storage Storage Pool Status Storage Manager Status OK OK Storage Pool Disk HAID Shelves Storage Usage Storage Usage Storage Used 20.1 GB 0 % Max 4.4 TB Tape Device Disk Usage Namesi Number of Cartridges User Data Stored Size On Disk Deduplication Deduplication ratio Library 1 20 - - ✓ 1.0:1 Igt 24 - ✓ 1.0:1 NAS Share Disk Usage Namesi Entrada User Data Stored Size On Disk Deduplication Deduplication ratio Oracle3 8 0 B 0 B ✓ 1.0:1 Shared5 19.8 GB 8.1 GB ✓ 2.5:1 Backup_Share 1 0 B 0 B ✓ 1.0:1 Target6 19.8 GB 8.7 GB ✓ 2.5:1

Storage usage

This section provides information about total disk usage. Use it to check the total disk space c when the total disk space is reaching capacity. The Storage Usage bar indicates how much of the disk has been used to store backup data from the host(s). The maximum storage capacity is s to the right of the bar. The system will send warning messages to email recipients (if configure when the storage is reaching capacity. The Storage icon on the Summary page will also indi that space is running out.

Tape device disk usage

This section shows a list of available libraries with their number of cartridges, amount of user stored and whether deduplication is enabled. The list will be empty if the StoreOnce Backup S is offline or if no virtual tape libraries have been created.

NAS shares disk usage

This section shows a list of available NAS shares, amount of user data stored and size on disk, and whether deduplication is enabled. The list will be empty if the StoreOnce Backup System is offline or if no NAS shares have been created.

RAID

The RAID tab shows the status of the RAID controller and the logical units.

The following screen shot is from an HP D2D4300 Series model. HP D2D4100 Series models only have one RAID controller.

Storage Network iSCSI Fibre Channel Log Storage Storage Pool Status Storage Manager Status RAID operational but parity not yet initialised OK Storage Pool Disk RAID Shelves RAID Controllers RAID Controllers RAID Battery Slot 4 OK Internal OK Slot 5 OK Logical Units Logical Unit Id Status RAID State Shell Size 600508E1001054395358504E35490E00 OK OK Slot:4 Port:2E 4.3 GB 600508E1001054395358504E35490F00 RAID operational but parity not yet initialised (62%) OK Slot:4 Port:2E 9.0 TB Erano

RAID controllers

RAID Controllers:This is the ID of the RAID controller. HP D2D4300 Series: There is an entry for the internal shelf and each expansion shelf that has been installed. Expansion shelves are identified by the slot number. Select a shelf to display information about its logical units. HP D2D4100 Series: There is only one in the current system.
RAID Battery:In normal operation, this shows green, OK. If a battery fails, please replace it as soon as possible. The status of the RAID and the RAID battery are also shown on theSummarypage. See the HP StoreOnce Backup System Maintenance and Service Guide for more information about replacing the RAID battery.

Logical units

Each shelf consists of two logical units. The smaller unit contains configuration information; the larger unit contains the data. These units always act as pairs.

The Erase button is only active if any RAID has failed and is not recoverable. The logical units must be erased from the bottom up (start with the highest Logical Unit number and work backwards). Use with care and only when advised to do so by HP Customer Support.

This is a unique ID for the logical unit.Logical Unit ID:
This is the status of the logical unit.Status:
RAID State:This is the RAID state of the logical unit. The only time the RAID state may be diff pairs of logical units is when the RAID is rebuilding or initializing/optimizing.
Shelf:This identifies the RAID card and port to which the shelf is connected, if you have an external shelf in the RAID controller list.
This is the size of the logical unit.Size:

Shelves

This page shows the status of the shelves and the physical disks. You can also use it to be a disk within the StoreOnce Backup System. The Beacon LED on the front of the individual disk Blue.

Storage Network ISCSI Fibre Channel Log Storage Storage Pool Status Storage Manager Status RAID operational but parity not yet initialised OK Storage Pool Disk RAID Shelves Shelves Shelf Status Configuration State Disks Slot 4 Port 2E RAID operational but parity not yet initialised Configured 12 Internal OK Available for storage 12 Slot 5 Port 1E OK Available for storage 12 Slot 5 Port 2E OK Available for storage 12 Physical Disks Disk State Description Serial No FW Version Size Spore Beacon Disk 1 OK GB1000EAFJL 9QJ4606S HPG8 1.0 TB □ Disk 2 OK GB1000EAFJL 9QJ45C15 HPG8 1.0 TB □ Disk 3 OK GB1000EAFJL 9QJ462VD HPG8 1.0 TB □ Disk 4 OK GB1000EAFJL 9QJ460C0 HPG8 1.0 TB □ Disk 5 OK GB1000EAFJL 9QJ461E2 HPG8 1.0 TB □ Disk 6 OK GB1000EAFJL 9QJ4623M HPG8 1.0 TB □ Disk 7 OK GB1000EAFJL 9QJ439V1 HPG8 1.0 TB □ Disk 8 OK GB1000EAFJL 9QJ42XJD HPG8 1.0 TB □ Disk 9 OK GB1000EAFJL 9QJ38KDF HPG8 1.0 TB □ Disk 10 OK GB1000EAFJL 9QJ460FC HPG8 1.0 TB □ Disk 11 OK GB1000EAFJL 9QJ45ZFG HPG8 1.0 TB □ Disk 12 OK GB1000EAFJL 9QJ41W68 HPG8 1.0 TB

Shelves

Click on a shelf (it is highlighted in blue) to display the disks located in that shelf in the Phy. Disks section.

Shelf:This is the shelf number. HP D2D4100 Series: Shelf 0 is the HP StoreOnce Backup System; Shelf 1 is the Capacity Upgrade Kit, if installed. HP D2D4300 Series: Internal refers to the HP StoreOnce Backup System. Additional shelves show the card slot and port number to which they are attached. These Backup Systems may have up to 3 additional shelves.
Status:In normal operation, this shows green, OK. If one or more disks fail, it shows a failed icc and a message. The disk should be replaced as soon as possible. See Hard disk replacement (page 136) for more information about replacing the disk.
Configuration State:This indicates whether the shelf has been configured. It is shown as not configured if it is not yet part of the storage pool.
The number of available physical disks in the shelf including the online spare disk.Disks:

Physical disks

When you select a shelf, the disks within it are displayed in the Physical Disks section. Use the information in this section to identify disks that may be failing or disks that are approaching capacity.

!

IMPORTANT: If you need to replace a disk, it is very important to obtain the serial number and the physical location of the failed disk from this page before you replace it. We strongly recommend that you use this page to beacon a disk within the StoreOnce Backup System. The Beacon LED c the front of the individual disk will show solid blue.

Disk:This indicates the physical location of the disk and is useful if you need to replace a disk. Always double check against the serial number after removing a disk.
State:This is the status of the physical disk. Possible states are - OK, Failed, Missing, Too Small, Rebuilding, Predictive Failure.
This is the product number of the disk.Description:
Serial No:This is the serial number of the disk. Always make a note of this before replacing a failed disk.
FW Version:This is the software version of the disk. It may be useful for troubleshooting and when replacing a disk.
Size:This is 2 TB (HP D2D4324), 1 TB (HP D2D4112/4312) or 500 GB (HP D2D4106). This shows the size of each disk in your StoreOnce Backup System. The sum of the disks gives the total raw capacity available. However, the usable capacity is always less due to the RAID configuration used across the disks. See the Storage glossary entry for more information.
This indicates the location of the online spare disk. It is normally:Spare:HP D2D4300 Series: Disk 1 for the internal shelf and Disk 12 for an expansion shelfHP D2D4100 Series: Disk 12The box will be unchecked if a disk fails and the online spare takes over from the failed disk. Once you replace the disk and the RAID rebuilds, the box against Disk 1 or Disk 12 is checked again as it resumes its function of online spare disk
Beacon:Check this box to beacon the LED on the front of the disk. This helps you identify the disk that needs attention and the shelf that contains it.

Disk (Status)

This page provides information about total disk usage and disk usage for each library and NAS share configured on the HP D2D2500 Series Backup System. It also shows deduplication ratios. Use it to check when the total disk space is reaching capacity.

NOTE: This page is not displayed with HP D2D4100 and HP D2D4300 Series Backup Systems.

Disk RAID iSCs Log Disk Usage Disk Usage Used 341 VB 6% Max 2.2 T8 Deduplication Ratio (5.8 : 1) Tape Device Disk Usage Name Nuumber of Cartridges User Data Stored Deduplication Library 1 8 2.0 GB Library 5 8 0.8 Library 6 8 0.8 NAS Share Disk Usage Name User Data Stored Deduplication Share2 0 B ✓ Share3 0 B ✓ Share6 0 B ✓

Disk usage

This section shows you how much disk space has been used.

Table 12 Disk usage parameters

Used GB:The red area indicates how much of the disk has been used to store backup data from the host(s). The maximum disk capacity is shown to the right of the chart. The system will send warning messages to email recipients that the disks are reaching capacity. The Disk Usage icon on the Summary page will also indicate that disk space is running out.
The deduplication ratio is updated whenever data is written to disk.Deduplication ratio:

Options for creating space, if the disks start to get full, include:

  • Review your backup jobs to see if you can reduce the size of backup or retention time.
  • Use the backup application job settings to overwrite or erase data.

Tape device disk usage

This section shows you how the individual libraries are using disk space.

Table 13 Device disk usage parameters

This is the name of the library.Name:
Number of cartridges:This is the number of cartridges configured for that library on the Devices page.
This is the amount of user data stored on that library.User data stored:
Deduplication:This indicates that deduplication is enabled for that library on the Devices page.

NAS share disk usage

This page shows information about disk usage of the NAS backup targets.

Table 14 NAS share disk usage parameters

Name:This is the name of the NAS share.
User data stored:This is the amount of user data stored on that NAS share. That is the amount of data that the backup application has backed up to the share. This figure is undeduplicated data.
Deduplication:This indicates that deduplication is enabled for that NAS share.

RAID (Status)

This page provides information about the RAID status, and the status of the physical disks on the HP D2D2500 Series Backup System.

NOTE: This page is not displayed with HP D2D4100 or HP D2D4300 Series Backup Systems.

Use it to identify disks that may be failing or disks that are approaching capacity. You can also use it to beacon a disk within the StoreOnce Backup System. The Beacon LED on the front of the individual disk is solid blue.

D2D Backup System Name Virtual Type Address NAS Corporations Status Implementation Administration D2DB5CR3058AA7 IPN4 16.3 IPN6 26201.6:17-6502.21 Disk RAD ACT9 Log Raid Status RAID State OK RAID Battery The RAID battery backup is UK Physical Drive Disk Description Same No.FIR Status Size State Disk 1 ATA GB/T/SIC4H54 SQOJ/SCB,MFG3 750.2 GB OK Disk 2 ATA GB/T/SIC4H54 SQOJ/MEX,MFG3 750.2 GB OK Disk 3 ATA GB/T/SIC4H54 SQOJ/MX,MFG3 750.2 GB OK Disk 4 ATA GB/T/SIC4H54 SQOJ/CFI,MFG3 750.2 GB OK Language English © 2009 Hewlett Packard Company, L.P.

RAID status

In normal operation, this shows green, OK.

If one or more disks fail, it shows a failed icon.

Physical disks

This section provides information about the physical disks. If you need to replace a disk, it is very important to obtain the serial number and the physical location of the failed disk from this page before you replace it.

Table 15 Physical disk parameters

Disk:This indicates the physical location of the disk and is useful if you need to replace a disk. Always double check against the serial number after removing a disk.
This is the product number of the disk.Description:
Serial No:This is the serial number of the disk. Always make a note of this before replacing a failed disk.
SW Version:This is the software version of the disk. It may be useful for troubleshooting and when replacing a disk.
This is 500 GB for the HP D2D2502i; 1 TB for the HP D2D2504i.Size:
This indicates the state of the disk. Green indicates OK, red indicates a failed disk.State:
Beacon:Check this box to beacon the LED on the front of the disk. This helps you identify the disk that needs attention.

Network (Status)

This page shows the network status of the HP D2D4300 Series Backup System and the status of the port(s). The Summary page shows only the overall network status. If there is a problem on or of the ports, it will display a warning but not identify which port has failed. (The failed icon is t Red square with white X.)

Use this page to get more information about the status of individual ports.

D2D Backup System Home Virtual Tape Devices Configuration Status Replication Administration D2D-CZJ9340854 192.168.1.101 Status Storage Network iSCSI Fibre Channel Log Network Status Overall Status ✓ OK Default Gateway 192.168.1.1 DNS Addresses - Port Status Port Domain IP Address IPV6 Address MAC Address Status Quality 1G Port 3 D2D-CZJ9340854.gtr.hp.com 192.168.1.101/255.255.0.0 fe80..225.b3ff.fea.a762/64 00.25 B3.AA.A7.62 ✓ 1Gb/s Excellent

iSCSI (Status)

This page shows the iSCSI details for all the devices that are configured on the HP StoreOnce Backup System. There are two tabs: Media Changer iSCSI details and Drive iSCSI Details. Click on a device to select it and display the associated iSCSI information.

NOTE: There is also an Active Connections tab which displays information about open iSCSI sessions. If all sessions are inactive (not connected), this tab is not displayed.

This page is mainly for information and is useful in troubleshooting. It cannot be edited. If a device is showing as not connected, this indicates that the iSCSI Initiator on the host has logged on. Log on using the iSCSI Initiator and set the device as a Persistent Target for that This ensures that it will automatically log on again whenever the host is rebooted.

Disk RAID iSCSI Fibre Channel Log Devices Name Cartridges Role Status Connection Device Type Port Library 2 24 Replication Source Online Not Connected MSL G3 Series (2x24) / LTO 3 iSCSI Port Library 5 24 Non Replicating Online Not Connected MSL G3 Series (2x24) / LTO 3 iSCSI Port Create library Library 2 Media Changer iSCSI Details Drive iSCSI Details Media Changer iSCSI Target NameSQn.1966-03.com.hp:storage.c2dbs.cr201b0bf1.500143885cd9ed43.library2.robotics Media Changer iSCSI AliasD2DBS.CR201B0BF1.Library2.Robotics Media Changer Serial Numberd2dgut095

Fibre Channel (Status)

This page shows the details for all the FC devices that are configured on the HP StoreOnce E System. Select a library in the Devices list to view the connection details for the library's medi changer and drive(s).

This page is mainly for information and is useful in troubleshooting. It cannot be edited.

Storage Network i$CSI Fibre Channel Log Port Status Port Status FC Port 1 Unknown speed FC Port 2 Not Used Devices Name Cartridges Role Status Connection Device Type Port Library 1 24 Non Replicating Online Not Connected MSL G3 Series (2x24) / LTO 3 FC Port 1 Library 2 24 Non Replicating Online Not Connected MSL G3 Series (2x24) / LTO 3 FC Port 1 Library 1 Device Name Port ID World Wide Node Name World Wide Port Name Port Type Number of Logins Media Changer Address not acquired 50:01:43:8D:62:CA:8C:DC 50:01:43:87:5D:01:13:7D - Drive 1 Address not acquired 50:01:43:8E:5A:4E:B1:63 50:01:43:8C:54:04:81:36 -

Devices section

The details in this section reflect settings that were configured for this library when it was created on the Devices page or when the Fibre Channel was configured. These settings can only be edited on the appropriate Configuration page. If the Connection field for all devices on the same port is showing Not Connected, check the physical FC connection. Examine the FC switch for visibility of the devices. Some configuration changes may be necessary or the configuration may not be supported.

Library section

There is a row for each device associated with the library. The Device Type determines the numb of drives.

  • The Port ID is three hexadecimal numbers and is known as the FC address by some manufacturers. If the device is not connected, this field will be blank.
    • The Port Type describes the nature of the connection and should match the Topology details.
  • The Number of logins is the number of hosts currently with an active logical connection to this device. To be used at least one active connection is required. Too large a number indicates that the device has been zoned inappropriately and could cause issues.

Storage Reporting (Status)

This page has three tabs that allow you to select Overall, Libraries or Shares storage reporting. Each tab allows you select Data and/or the Period from drop-down boxes to specify the axes for the graph.

There are three Data types:

• Dedupe ratio
- Disk storage
- Data storage

The Period may be weekly or monthly.

See the D2D Best Practices for VTL, NAS and Replication implementations for more information about using these graphs in conjunction with other information to decide whether it may be necessary to take action to improve performance and what action may be appropriate.

In the following example Dedupe Ratio has been selected as the Data type.

HP StoreOnce G2 - Storage Reporting (Status) - 1

line | Date | Dedupe Ratio | | ---------- | ------------ | | 18 Dec | 25 | | 22 Dec | 25 | | 25 Dec | 25 | | 30 Dec | 25 | | 03 Jan | 25 | | 07 Jan | 25 | | 11 Jan | 25 | | 15 Jan | 25 |

Log (Status)

This page presents a time and date-stamped list of significant system events. The most recent information is shown at the top of the list. The icons identify whether the messages are inform error or warning messages.

The Log is maintained even if the HP StoreOnce Backup System is power cycled. Use the Cled Log button to clear the log.

Disk RAID SCDR Fibre Channel Log Log Messages + Show Search Box Date Time Severity Message 2009/08/25 16:16 Deleted Weekly Schedule for Library 2 2009/08/25 16:15 NAS share Shared created 2009/08/25 16:15 NAS share Shared created 2009/08/25 16:13 Replication Source Appliance detected Target Appliance d20gukevpc02 making connection 2009/08/25 16:13 System Status: Good 2009/08/25 16:13 RAID parity installation is 100 % complete 2009/08/25 16:13 Invalid BIOS Assembly name 2009/08/25 16:13 System Starting 2009/08/25 16:13 System was not shutdown clearly 2009/08/25 16:10 Stopping System 2009/08/25 16:09 Replication Source Appliance detected Target Appliance d20gukevpc02 making connection 2009/08/25 16:09 System Status: Good 2009/08/25 16:09 RAID parity installation is 100 % complete 2009/08/25 16:09 Invalid BIOS Assembly name 2009/08/25 16:09 System Starting 2009/08/25 16:09 System was not shutdown clearly 2009/08/25 16:06 Stopping System1 2009/08/25 15:11 Tape Attach Job ID 43 Successfully Completed 2009/08/25 15:11 Destroyed cartridge 23A6EBB3 in Library 5 2009/08/25 15:10 Cartridge Barcode changed from 6C334DF to 3C416474 2009/08/25 15:10 Created cartridge BC334DF 2009/08/25 15:10 Created cartridge 23A6EBB3

Sorting and searching the log

Click on any column heading to sort messages according to that criterion. For example, click Date to sort the messages according to date.

Click on Show Search Box to display a Filter field and two drop-down menus.

  • Use the right-hand drop-down menu to filter on severity, for example to display all Error messages.
  • Use the middle drop-down menu to select a column (or All) and the type a search string into the Filter box.

7 Replication

The Replication menu allows you to monitor and configure all aspects of replication. The following options are available.

  • Status (Replication)
    •Virtual Tape Mappings (Replication)
    •NAS Mappings (Replication)
    •Partner Appliances (Replication)
  • Local Appliance (Replication)
    •Event History (Replication)

These pages allow you to monitor and configure replication. If you are new to replication we strongly recommend that you read the following documents, which are available from the HP web site. They provide a detailed discussion about replication deployment strategies and terminology and include examples using the Replication and Recovery wizards.

  • HP StoreOnce Backup System Concepts Guide: If you are new to the HP StoreOnce Backup System, it is a good idea to read this guide before you configure your system. It describes tl StoreOnce technology and advises how to plan the workload being placed on the HP StoreOnce Backup System in order to optimize performance and minimize the impact of deduplication, replication and housekeeping operations competing for resources.
    D2D Best Practices for VTL, NAS and Replication implementations: This guide describes best practices and aslo includes examples using different backup applications.

Status (Replication)

The top part of this page shows the replication status summary of the appliance which may be:

•OK
• A target appliance is offline
- A mapped share (NAS) or slot pair (VTL) is not synchronized, or out of sync for a certain number of days (hours), depending upon the settings for warning/critical out of sync hours
There is also a second line that indicates whether the appliance is licensed as a replication target or not.

The central section of this page contains information about replication throughput and active sessions. These tables show an average throughput over a period time so will not produce accurate data straight away

The bottom half of the page contains three tabs, that show status details for:

- Current Issues such as: a target appliance is offline or a mapped share (NAS) or slot pair (VTL) is not synchronized, or out of sync for a certain number of days (hours), depending up the settings for warning/critical out of sync hours

- Source Active Jobs

•Target Active Jobs

Click and highlight any of the status details to display more information about the issue.

Status Virtual Tape Mapings MAS Mapings Partner Appliances Local Appliance Event History Replication Status Summary Replication Status OK Licensed Replication Throughput Totals (recent averages) Source Data Job Transmit Bandwidth (Current Limit: No Limit) 0 Kbps Command and Data Transmit Bandwidth 0.0 Mbps Data Job Outbound Throughput 0.0 Mbps Command and Data Receive Bandwidth 0.0 Mbps Data Job Inbound Throughput 0.0 Mbps Active Sessions Source Jobs Running 0 Target Jobs Running 0 Connected Source Appliances 1 Status Details Current Issues Source Active Jobs Target Active Jobs There are currently no Replication issues

Virtual Tape Mappings (Replication)

This page allows you to configure and view how cartridges are mapped between source and target libraries. (NAS share mappings are managed on a separate tab.)

NOTE: You can only map and replicate deduplicating libraries and you can only map libraries of the same version.

D2D Backup System Home Virtual Tape Devices NAS Configuration Status Replication Administration d0dgukevpic02 : IPV4 16 IPV6 2620:0 a17 e020 21a 41 Status Virtual Tape Mappings NAS Mapping3 Partner Appliances Local Appliance Event History Local Libraries Library Name Role Status User Data Stored Mapped Slots Total Slots Device Type Version Library 2 Replication Source Online 3.1 GB 24 24 MSL G3 Series (2x24) / LTO 3 1 Library 3 Replication Target Online 1.6 GB 24 24 MSL G3 Series (2x24) / LTO 3 1 Library 5 Non Replicating Online 1.6 GB - 24 MSL G3 Series (2x24) / LTO 3 1 Slot Mappings Slot Mapping Name Target Appliance Name Target Appliance Address Target Appliance Online Target Appliance Serial Number Target Library Name Target Library Status Blackout Window Active Replication Status Slot Mapping 1 d0dgukevpic02 18.26.130.95 Online CR201B05F1 Library 3 Online No Synchronized Remove Mapping Details Show Slot Details Mapping Name Slot Mapping 1 Replication Status Synchronised Mapped Slots 24 Number of Slots Out of Sync 0 Recovery Active No Average Throughput 14 MB/s using 0 MB/s bandwidth, saving 100 % Source Library Target Library Total Slots 24 24 User Data Stored 3.1 GB 1.0 GB Size On Disk - Blackout Window Active No No Language English © 2009 Hewlett Packard Company, L.P.

Local library

This section contains a list of all available local libraries. Local Libraries are the libraries that been configured on this HP StoreOnce Backup System.

  • Non-replicating library: a library on this HP StoreOnce Backup System whose slots have not yet been mapped for replication. Replication and Recovery Wizards are available only with non-replicating libraries.
  • Replication-Source library: a library on this HP StoreOnce Backup System with cartridges that have been mapped for replication. You do not have to map all cartridges in a

Replication-Source Library and the Replication-Target Library does not have to contain the same number of cartridges as the Replication-Source Library.

- Replication-Target library: a library on this HP StoreOnce Backup System with slots that hold cartridges replicated from a Replication-Source library. The option is available to recover individual cartridges from Replication-Target libraries.

Table 16 Local library parameters

The name of the library, defined when the library device was created.Library Name
The status of the local library (such as online)Library Status
RoleThe role, which may be non-replicating, replication-source or replication-target. All library devices are initially non-replicating, until slots have been configured using this page.
The amount in GB of user data stored.User Data Stored
The amount of space used on the disk.Size on disk
The number of slots that have been mapped.Mapped Slots
The total number of slots configured on the library device.Total Slots
Device TypeThe emulation type configured for that library.
Library VersionThe version number of the library.
Replication statusReplication status, which may be Synchronised, Synchronising or Pending Synchronisation.

Slot mappings

Select a local library to display slot mappings for that library.

You can also remove a slot mapping by clicking on the Remove button.

Table 17 Slot mapping parameters

Replication-Source or Replication-Target library selected
Slot Mapping NameThis is the slot mapping name. Is it created when you run the wizard to define the grouping of slots that you select.
Source/Target Appliance NameThe name of the Target Appliance to which cartridges will be replicated.
Source/Target Appliance AddressThe IP address of the Target Appliance to which cartridges will be replicated.
Source/Target Appliance OnlineThis indicates whether a replication link is established with the partner appliance.
Source/Target Appliance Serial NumberThe serial number of the Target Appliance to which cartridges will be replicated.
Source/Target Library NameThe name of the library to which cartridges will be replicated on the Target Appliance .
Source/Target Library StatusThe status of the partner library (such as online).
Blackout Window ActiveThis relates to the local appliance in its role as a source or target appliance. No replication jobs will be started if the source or target appliance for a mapping are in blackout, and any running jobs for the mapping will be paused.
Replication StatusThis shows whether the mapping is synchronized.

Slot mapping details

The two tabs at the bottom of this page show more detailed mapping information for the sele library and slot mapping.

Library Details tab

This tab details mapping details between source and target libraries. If a source library has been selected, it will tell you whether Recovery is in process; if a target library has been selected, tell you whether the target library is visible to the host. All other information is identical for b-source and target libraries. For example, use this tab to find out:

•The number of mapped slots and replication status

•The average throughput of data

You can only edit the Mapping Name on this tab.

Slot Details tab

This tab displays details for each mapped slot in the selected slot mapping. It includes average throughput data for each slot. If you have selected a source library, you will be able to:

- Edit the Target Slot to which a Source Slot is mapped.

- Enable the Recover First checkbox, which enables a user to request that a mapped slot be recovered from Target to Source, if required.

The replication wizards

When you select a Non-Replicating library, you will be able to run the Replication or Recover wizard.

- Use the Replication wizard to create slot mappings for the non-replicating library; it becomes a Source library. See Running the replication wizard (virtual tape devices) for more information.

- Use the Recovery wizard to recover cartridges from a Target Library. See Recovering a source appliance, VTL devices for more information.

Running the replication wizard (virtual tape devices)

The Replication Wizard is used to create new mappings between Non-Replicating Libraries (wh become Replication Source Libraries) and either existing or new Target Libraries.

  1. Create a Non-Replicating Library on the Source Appliance.
  2. Create a backup rotation scheme and allow the first full backup to run.
  3. Decide how you will seed the first full backup on the Target Appliance. Are you seeding of the WAN or have you been able to colocate the Target Appliance on the same LAN as Source Appliance? See the HP StoreOnce Backup System Concepts Guide for a more detailed discussion about seeding.
  4. Go to the Replication-Virtual Tape Mappings page and select a Non-Replicating Library to be converted to a Replication Source Library.

Status Virtual Tape Mappings NAS Mappings Partner Appliances Local Appliance Event History Local Libraries Library Name Role Status User Date Stored Size On Disk Mapped Slots Total Slots Device Type Library Version Repair Library 2 Non Redicating Online 7.0 GB 820 B - 24 MSL GS Series (2x26) / LTO 3 1 Library 2 Configure a new slot mapping between the selected local library and a library on a target appliance. Start Replication Wizard Map the local library as a source library and recover cartridges from the target. Start Recovery Wizard

  1. Click Start Replication Wizard and proceed to the Select Target Appliance step.

HP StoreOnce G2 - Running the replication wizard (virtual tape devices) - 2

TIP: Click on the show/hide details link to check how many target appliances are permitted and the number of target appliances that are currently configured.

Virtual Tape Replication Wizard ✓ Welcome Select Target Appliance Select Target Library Edit Slot Mapping Summary Step 1 - Select Target Appliance The purpose of this slot is to select the appliance which houses the desired partner library. Select Target Appliance + Click to show/hide details box • Maximum Number of Target Appliances Permitted: 4 • Number of Target Appliances Configured: 9 Appliance Name Appliance Address Serial Number Free Space Online Protocol Version Add Target Appliance < Back Next > Cancel Help

  1. Select a Target Appliance from the list and click Next.

Virtual Tape Replication Wizard ✓ Welcome Select Target Appliance Select Target Library Edit Slot Mapping Summary Step 1 - Select Target Appliance The purposes of this site is to select the appliance which house the desired sector library. Select Target Appliance + Click to show/hide details box Appliance Name Appliances Address Serial Number.Free Space Online Protocol Version 03D:CZ083018NY 192.168.0.111 CZC83018NY 7 TB ○ Online Version 2 Add Target Appliance < Back Next > Cancel Help

NOTE: If you want to select an appliance that is not yet on the list, click Add Target Appliance. Enter the Target Appliance IP Address or fully qualified domain name. The default values for the Command and Data Protocol Port Numbers are usually acceptable, but may be edited if there is a conflict. (If replication needs to take place through a firewall, the network administrator will need to open (TCP) ports 9387 (Command protocol) and 9388 (Data protocol) to allow the replication traffic to pass to and from the HP StoreOnce Backup System Click Add Target Appliance.

Virtual Type Replication Wizard ✓ Welcome Select Target Appliance Select Target Library Edit Slot Mapping Summary Step 1 - Select Target Appliance The purpose of this site is to select the appliance which houses the desired partner library. Create New Target Appliance Target Appliance Address 192.168.0.111 Command Protocol Port Number $387 Data Protocol Port Number $388 Add Target Appliance < Back Next> Cancel Help

  1. The wizard then moves to the Select Target Library step. Select a library on the target app and click Next.

Virtual Tape Replication Wizard ✓ Welcome ✓ Select Target Appliance ✓ Select Target Library Edit Slot Mapping Summary Step 2 - Select Target Library The purpose of this step is to select the accred partner library. Select Target Library - Click to show/hide details box Library Name: Role Status Slot Mappings Mapped Total Library Library 1 Non Online - 24 1 Replicating Create New Target Library < Back Next > Cancel Help

NOTE: If you need to create a new library on the target appliance, click Create New Target Library. Set up the details as you would normally do when creating a new library device. When creating libraries on a target device it is possible to create libraries with 0 (zero) Attempting to create a library with more drives than those available on the target will fail a suggestion that there may be too many drives already in use on the target. You cannot create a new target library if Source Appliance Permissions is enabled on the selected target appliance. Instead the library must be first created on the target before map from the source.

Virtual Tape Replication Wizard ✓ Welcome ✓ Select Target Appliance ▶ Select Target Library Edit Slot Mapping Summary Step 2 - Select Target Library The purpose of the stop is to select the secreted partner library. New Target Library Details Name SepTarget Emulsion Type MSL 03 Series (2x24) Number of Slots 24 (Range: 8 - 24, Default: 24) Number of Drives 1 Drive emulsion LTO 5 Deduplication ✓ Required Field Create Target Library < Back Next > Cancel Help

  1. This takes you to the Edit Slot Mapping step. Enter a Slot Mapping Name. The slot number and barcodes of all source cartridges are displayed. A new barcode is generated for them on the target library (these barcodes will be overwritten with those of the source when replication starts). By default, all slots on the Source are selected for mapping and mapped to available slots on the Target library. If you want to deselect cartridges from this slot mapp configuration, select Unmapped from the Target Slot Name drop-down menu.

Virtual Tape Replication Wizard ✓ Welcome ✓ Select Target Appliance ✓ Select Target Library ► Edit Slot Mapping Summary Step 3 - Edit Slot Mapping The purpose of this slot is to configure the slot mapping which will be created. Slot Mapping for Local Libraries: Library 2 to Target Library: RepTarget on Appliances: D20-CZC83619YY + ReMap... Slot Mapping Name: Rep Target Library Mapping Items Per Page 200 Source Slot Cartridge Barcode Target Slot Cartridge Barcode Slot 1 40F1564 Slot 1 00F33FF7 Slot 2 40F1565 Slot 2 00F33FFS Slot 3 40F1566 Slot 3 00F33FFS Slot 4 40F1567 Slot 4 00F33FFA Slot 5 40F1568 Slot 5 00F33FFB Slot 6 40F1569 Slot 6 00F33FFC Slot 7 40F156A Slot 7 00F33FFD Slot 8 40F156B Slot 8 00F33FFE Slot 9 40F156C Slot 9 00F33FFF Slot 10 40F156D Slot 10 00F34000 Slot 11 40F156E Slot 11 00F34001 Slot 12 40F156F Slot 12 00F34002 < Back Next > Cancel Help

  1. Click Next to display a summary of the replication configuration that you have created.

Virtual Tape Replacement Wizard ✓ Welcome ✓ Select Target Appliance ✓ Select Target Library ✓ Edit Slot Mapping ✓ Summary Summary Spot Mapping Name Rep Target Library Mapping Source Library Library 2 on Local Appliance Target Library RepTarget on Appliance: D20-CZ03018NY Source Slot Cambridge Barcode Target Slot Cambridge Barcode Spot 1 4CF1664 Sot 1 0DF93PFF7 Spot 2 4CF1665 Sot 2 0DF93PFF8 Spot 3 4CF1666 Sot 3 0DF93PFF9 Spot 4 4CF1667 Sot 4 0DF93PFFA Spot 5 4CF1668 Sot 5 0DF93PFFB Spot 6 4CF1669 Sot 6 0DF93PFFC Spot 7 4CF166A Sot 7 0DF93PFFD Spot 8 4CF166B Sot 8 0DF93PFFE Spot 9 4CF166C Sot 9 0DF93PFFF Spot 10 4CF166D Sot 10 0DF94000 Spot 11 4CF166E Sot 11 0DF94001 Spot 12 4CF166F Sot 12 0DF94002 Spot 13 4CF1670 Sot 13 0DF94003 Spot 14 4CF1671 Sot 14 0DF94004 Spot 15 4CF1672 Sot 15 0DF94005 Spot 16 4CF1673 Sot 16 0DF94006 Spot 17 4CF1674 Sot 17 0DF94007 Spot 18 4CF1675 Sot 18 0DF94008 Spot 19 4CF1676 Sot 19 0DF94009 < Back Apply Cancel Help

  1. Click Apply to create the slot mapping configuration. Replication of cartridges will start as soon as the libraries have been synchronised. Look at the Replication Status field on the Library Details tab of the Virtual Tape Mappings page. It changes from "Pending Synchronisation" to "Synchronising" to "Synchronized".

D2D Backup System Home Virtual Tape Devices NAS Configuration Status Replication Administration D2D-MX0011086V: 192.168.0.110 Status Virtual Tape Mappings NAS Mappings Partner Appliances Local Appliance Event History Local Libraries Library Name Role Status User Data Stored Size On Disk Mapped Slots Total Slots Device Type Library Version Replication Status Library 2 Replication Source Online 17.5 GB 3.3 GB 24 24 MSL 55 Series (2x24) /LTG 3 1 Synchronized Slot Mappings Slot Mapping Name Target Appliance Address Target Appliance Online Target Appliance Serial Number Target Library Name Target Library Status Blackout Window Active Replication Status Rep Target Library Mapping ODD-CZC0301BNV 192.168.0.111 Online CZC0301BNV RepTarget Online No Synchronized Remove Rep Target Library Mapping Library Details Slot Details Mapping Details Mapping Name Red Target Library Mapping Replication Status Synchronised Mapped Slots 24 Number of Slots Out of Sync 0 Recovery Active No Average Throughput 79.6 MB/s using 101.7 Mb/s bandwidth, saving 71 % Source Library Target Library Total Slots 24 24 User Data Stored 17 GB 17 GB Size On Disk 3 GB - Backout Window Active No No Edit

NOTE: If you were able to colocate the Target Appliance on the same LAN as the Source Appliance to improve replication performance, remember to relocate the Target Appliance to the target site as soon as the cartridges are synchronized.

Figure 1 Replication creation process
HP StoreOnce G2 - Running the replication wizard (virtual tape devices) - 11

flowchart
graph TD
    A["Start"] --> B["Create non-replicating library on source appliance"]
    B --> C["Create backup rotation scheme and allow first full backup to run"]
    C --> D["On the Mapping Configuration page select the non-replicating library on the source appliance."]
    D --> E["Select Start Replication Wizard."]
    D --> F["Select the target appliance (or create a new one)."]
    D --> G["Select the target library (or create a new one)."]
    D --> H["Edit slot mapping name and map required slots between source and target."]
    D --> I["Confirm and finish configuration."]
    E --> J["Replication of cartridges will now start."]
    F --> J
    G --> J
    H --> J
    I --> J
    J --> K{Was target co-located with source?}
    K -->|Yes| L["When cartridges are synchronized, relocate target appliance to target site."]
    L --> M["End"]
    N["No"] --> K

NAS Mappings (Replication)

This page allows you to configure and view how NAS shares are mapped between source and target appliances. (Virtual tape library mappings are managed on a separate tab.)

Status Virtual Tape Mappings HAS Mappings Partner Appliances Local Appliance Event History Local Shares Name Role Status Access Protocol User Data Stored Size On Disk Entries Share Version Replication Status Share1 Non Replicating Online CIFS - - 1 1 . Share2 Replication Target Online CIFS - - 1 1 Synchronised Share3 Replication Source Online CIFS - - 1 1 Synchronised Share Mapping Mapping Name Source Appliance Name Source Appliance Address Source Appliance Online Source Appliance Serial Number Source Share Name Source Share Status Blackout Window Active Replication Status Share Mapping 1 D20-CZC83018NY 192.168.0.111 Online CZC83018NY Share3 Online No Synchronised Remove Share Details File Details Share Details Mapping Name Share Mapping 1 Replication Status Synchronised Number of Entries Out of Sync. 0 Average Throughput 0.0 MB/s using 0.0 Mb/s bandwidth, saving 0 % Source Share Target Share Number of Entries 1 1 User Data Stored - - - Size On Disk - - - Blackout Window Active No No Edit

Local shares

This section contains a list of all available NAS shares that have been configured on this HP StoreOnce Backup System.

  • Non-replicating: a share on this HP StoreOnce Backup System that has not yet been mapped for replication. Replication and Recovering Wizards are available only with non-replicating shares.
  • Replication-Source: a share on this HP StoreOnce Backup System that has been mapped for replication.
  • Replication-Target: a share on this HP StoreOnce Backup System that has been replicated from a Replication-Source share.

Table 18 Local share parameters

The name of the share, defined when the share was created.Share Name
The status of the local share, such as online.Share Status
RoleThe role, which may be non-replicating, replication-source or replication-target. All shares are initially non-replicating, until mappings have been configured using this page.
The amount in GB of user data stored.User Data Stored
The amount of space used on the disk.Size on disk
EntriesThe number of files and directories existing on the local share (every existing file and directory will be replicated if the share is mapped).
Access protocolThe access protocol that was configured when the NAS share was created: CIFS or NFS.
The version number of the share.Share Version
Replication statusReplication status, which may be Synchronisd, Synchronising

Share mappings

Select a local share to display its mapping.

You can also remove a share mapping by clicking on the Remove button.

IMPORTANT: Do not delete a replication mapping whilst a backup or restore operation is in progress, because the source device will temporarily be taken offline and any backup or restore jobs will fail.

Table 19 Share mapping parameters

Replication-Source or Replication-Target share selected
Share Mapping NameThis is the share mapping name. Is it created when you run the wizard to create the share mapping.
Source/Target Appliance NameThe name of the Target Appliance to which entries will be replicated.
Source/Target Appliance AddressThe IP address of the Target Appliance to which entries will be replicated.
Source/Target Appliance OnlineThis indicates whether a replication link is established with the partner appliance.
Source/Target Appliance Serial NumberThe serial number of the Target Appliance to which entries will be replicated.
Source/Target Share NameThe name of the share to which entries will be replicated on the Target Appliance.
The status of the partner share, such as online.Source/Target Share Status
Blackout Window ActiveThis relates to the local appliance in its role as a source or target appliance. No replication jobs will be started if the source or target appliance for a mapping are in blackout, and any running jobs for the mapping will be paused.
Replication StatusThis shows whether the mapping is synchronized.

Share mapping details

The two tabs at the bottom of this page show more detailed mapping information for the selected share and share mapping.

Share details tab

This tab details mapping details between source and target shares. If a source share has been selected, it will tell you whether Recovery is in process. All other information is identical for both source and target shares. For example, use this tab to find out:

• The status of mappings
• The average throughput of data

You can only edit the Mapping Name on this tab.

File details tab

This tab displays mapping details for each directory and files within it. It includes average through data for each file. You cannot edit any details on this tab, but you can click on any of the colu headings to sort the file details according to that column.

The replication wizards

When you select a Non-Replicating share, you will be able to run the Replication or Recoverir wizard.

  • Use the Replication wizard to create slot mappings for the non-replicating share; it becomes a Source share. See next section for more information.
  • Use the Recovery wizard to recover files from a Target share. See Recovering a source appliance, NAS shares (page 104) for more information.

Status Virtual Tape Mappings NAS Mappings Partner Appliances Local Appliance Event History Local Shares Name Role Status Usey Data Stored Files Access Protocol Version Share1 Non Replicating ✓ Online - 0 CIFS 1 Share4 Non Replicating ✓ Online - 0 CIFS 1 Mapping for Local Share Configure a new share mapping between the selected local share and a share on a target appliance. Start Replication Wizard Map the local share as a source share and recover files from the target. Start Recovery Wizard

Running the replication wizard (NAS)

The Replication Wizard is used to create new mappings between Non-Replicating NAS shares (which become Replication Source shares) and either existing or new Target shares. (See Recovering a source appliance, NAS shares (page 104) for information about the Recovery wizard.)

  1. Create a Non-Replicating Share on the Source Appliance.
  2. Allow the first full backup to run.
  3. Decide how you will seed the first full backup on the Target Appliance. (See also the HP StoreOnce Backup System Concept Guide.)

  4. If you are seeding across the WAN or have been able to colocate the Target Appliance on the same LAN as the Source Appliance, go to step 4.
    • If you are seeding using physical media:

  5. Create the first full backup on the Remote Site share.

  6. Map to the NAS share on the Source Appliance and copy the files from the NAS share to a USB disk.
  7. Transport the USB disk to the replication target site.
  8. Insert the USB disk into a host server on the same sub-net as the Target Appliance Map to the NAS Share on the Target Appliance and copy the files across from 1 USB disk.

Figure 2 Seeding initial data using a USB disk
HP StoreOnce G2 - Running the replication wizard (NAS) - 1

flowchart
graph TD
    subgraph Remote Site A
        A1["Host"] --> D2D2500["D2D2500"]
        B1["Host"] --> D2D2500
        D2D2500 --> D2D4000["D2D4000"]
    end
    subgraph Remote Site B
        B1["Host"] --> D2D2500["D2D2500"]
        B2["Host"] --> D2D2500
        D2D2500 --> D2D4000
        D2D4000 --> D2D4000
        D2D4000 --> USB_disk["USB disk"]
    end
    subgraph Data Center
        D2D4000 --> USB_disk["USB disk"]
    end
    D2D4000 --> USB_disk
    style Remote Site A fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style Remote Site B fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style Data Center fill:#ccf,stroke:#333
  1. Go to the NAS Mappings page.
  2. Select a Non-Replicating Share to be converted to a Replication Source Share and click Start Replication Wizard.

Status Virtual Tape Mappings NAS Mappings Partner Appliances Local Appliance Event History Local Shares Name Role Status Access Protocol User Data Shared Size On Disk Entries Share Version Replication Status Share1 Non Redicating Online CPS - - 1 1 Mapping for Local Share Configure a new share mapping between the selected local share and a share on a target appliance. Start Replication Wizard Map the local share as a source share and recover files from the target. Start Recovery Wizard

  1. Proceed to the Select Target Appliance step.

HP StoreOnce G2 - Running the replication wizard (NAS) - 3

TIP: Click on the show/hide details link to check how many target appliances are permitted and the number of target appliances that are currently configured.

MAS Application Wizard ✓ Welcome Select Target Appliance Select Target Share Edit Share Mapping Summary Step 1 - Select Target Appliance The purpose of this step is to select the appliance which houses the desired partner share. Select Target Appliance + Click to show/hide details box Appliance Name Appliance Address Sistal Number Free Space Online Protocol Version DCC-CZ083018NV 192168.0.112 CZ083018NY 7 TB ✓ Online Version 2 Add Target Appliance < Back Next > Cancel Help

  1. Select a Target Appliance from the list and click Next.

NOTE: If you want to select an appliance that is not yet on the list, click Add Target Appliance. Enter the Target Appliance IP Address or fully qualified domain name. The default values include the Command and Data Protocol Port Numbers are usually acceptable, but may be edited there is a conflict. (If replication needs to take place through a firewall, the network administrator will need to open (TCP) ports 9387 (Command protocol) and 9388 (Data protocol) to allow the replication traffic to pass to and from the HP StoreOnce Backup System Click Add Target Appliance.

  1. The wizard then moves to the Select Target Share step. Select a share on the target applic and click Next.

NOTE: If you need to create a new share on the target appliance, click Create New Target Share. Set up the details as you would normally do when creating a new share. You can create a new target share if the appliance to be used as the target has Replication Sour Permissions enabled.

NAS Replication Wizard ✓ Welcome ✓ Select Target Appliance ✓ Select Target Share Edit Share Mapping Summary Step 2 - Select Target Share The purpose of this step is to select the desired partner share. Select Target Appliance Share + Click to show how do store box Name Role Status Access Protocol User Date Stored Films Share Version Sheet1 Non Replicating Online CFS - 2 1 Create New Target Share < Back Next > Cancel Help

  1. Give the Share Mapping a name and click Next.

NAS Application Wizard ✓ Welcome ✓ Select Target Appliance ✓ Select Target Share ▶ Edit Share Mapping Summary Step 3 - Edit Share Mapping The purpose of this site is to configure the share mappings which will be created. Mapping for Local Share/Share1 to Share1 on D29-CZC836180Y Mapping Name Share Mapping 1 Number of Files 0 File System OPS Size of Share 0.6 < Back Next > Cancel Help

  1. The Summary screen is displayed. Click Apply to create the share mapping configuration. Replication of files will start immediately.

NOTE: If you were able to colocate the Target Appliance on the same LAN as the Source Appliance to improve replication performance, remember to relocate the Target Appliance to the target site as soon as the files are synchronized.

Figure 3 Replication creation process
HP StoreOnce G2 - Running the replication wizard (NAS) - 7

flowchart
graph TD
    A["Start"] --> B["Create non-replicating share on source appliance"]
    B --> C["Create backup rotation scheme and allow first full backup to run"]
    C --> D{Use USB disk for seeding?}
    D -->|Yes| E["1. Copy first full backup to USB disk.<br>2. Transport disk to target appliance and insert into host server.<br>3. Create non-replicating share on target and copy files from USB disk."]
    D -->|No| F["On the Mapping Configuration page select the non-replicating share on the source appliance.<br>1. Select Start Replication Wizard.<br>2. Select the target appliance (or create a new one).<br>3. Select the target share (or create a new one).<br>4. Edit share mapping name.<br>5. Confirm and finish configuration."]
    F --> G["Replication will now start."]
    G --> H{Was target co-located with source?}
    H -->|Yes| I["When shares are synchronized, relocate target appliance to target site."]
    H -->|No| J["End"]

Partner Appliances (Replication)

This page shows you the replication status of all Target and Source HP StoreOnce Backup Sys that have been configured for use with this HP StoreOnce Backup System. You can also add HP StoreOnce Backup Systems on this page, however, it is not necessary to do so before ma configurations because this option is also available when running the Replication wizard. Look the bottom of the page to find information about any blackout windows that apply to the sele appliance.

Status Virtual Tape Mappings NAS Mappings Partner Appliances Local Appliance Event History Partner Appliance Details Target Appliances Source Appliances Source Appliance Permissions Enabled Edit Source Appliances Add an Appliance's serial number to configure access permissions to shares and libraries Serial Number Appliance Name Appliance Status Appliance Address Configured Mappings All Appliances - - MXQ011096W D2D-MXQ011096W Online 16.26.134.56 Remove Add Permissions Configuring permissions allows you to limit access to libraries and shares. Source Appliances will only be able to configure mappings to libraries and shares which they have been granted access to. Libraries Shares Name Access DPBackupVTL Library 3

There are three tabs; one for Target Appliances and one for Source Appliances, and a separate tab for setting Source Appliance permissions.

- The Source Appliances tab is not editable. If the HP StoreOnce Backup System also has Replication-Target libraries, there may be multiple Source Appliances.

NOTE: Source Appliances are appliances that have added the local appliance as a Target Appliance. Only Source Appliances that are currently connected to the Target Appliance are listed.

•The Target Appliances tab allows you to add, edit and remove Target Appliance details.

- The Source Appliance Permissions tab allows you to lock down the ability to create share and library mappings so that, when the wizard is run and mappings are configured, the Target only has access to a list of sources that are allowed to replicate to it.

Summary Appliance details

Click on a tab to display a list of available appliances of that type. The following status details shown for the appliance.

Table 20 Summary Appliance details

The name of the appliance.Appliance Name
The health of the appliance; this shows you whether the appliance is running.Applioc
The address of the appliance.Appliance Address
The serial number of the appliance.Serial number
The amount of free space on the appliance.Free space
OnlineWhether the appliance is online.
Protocol versionThe protocol of the appliance software.

Click on an appliance to view more detailed status information in the bottom half of the screen, as described in (page 75).

To add a target appliance

Procedure 5

1. Click Add Target Appliance.

Figure 4 Create new target appliance
Create New Target Appliance Description Target Appliance Address Command Protocol Port Number 4893 Data Protocol Port Number 4834 Back Add Target Appliance

  1. Enter the Target Appliance Address.

  2. The default values for the Command and Data Protocol Port Numbers are usually acceptable, but may be edited if there is a conflict. (If replication needs to take place through a fire, the network administrator will need to open (TCP) ports 9387 (Command protocol) and 93 (Data protocol).)

  3. Click Add Target Appliance.

To edit or remove a Target Appliance

- Select the appliance and click Edit to edit the Appliance Name, IP address and protocol port details of the target appliance.

- Select the appliance and click Delete to remove an appliance from the list of Target Appliances available to that source.

Run Traceroute

Click Run Traceroute to check that the local appliance can communicate with the target appliance and identify the number of hops and latency in the routing.

Target Appliance tab

Table 21 Target appliance parameters

Target Appliance tab Some fields are editable.
Appliance NameThis is the name that is used to identify the Target Appliance. You specify it on the Local Appliance tab of the partner appliance.
Product ClassThe product class of the appliance, such as HP D2D4100.
Appliance AddressThis is the IP address of the Target Appliance. You specify it when you add the Target Appliance and may edit it later.
Serial NumberThis is the serial number of the Target Appliance; it cannot be edited.
Command Protocol Port NumberThis is the port number that will be used for command protocol.
Data Protocol Port NumberThis is the port number that will be used for data protocol.
AvailableThis field indicates whether the Target Appliance is available.
Replication protocolThis identifies the replication protocol in use.
CapacityThis shows the capacity of the Target Appliance.
Free SpaceThis shows the amount of free space on the Target Appliance.
Software versionThis shows the software version of the Target Appliance.This shows the current system time.System Time
Blackout window activeThis shows whether a blackout window is currently active. This means no replication will occur.
Blackout windowsAny blackout windows that have been specified will be reflected in this weekly calendar. During these times, the selected Target Appliance is not available for replication.

Summary Appliance tab

Table 22 Source appliance parameters

Source Appliance tab No fields are editable.
This is the name of the Source Appliance.Appliance Name
The product class of the appliance, such as HP D2D4000.Product Class
This is the IP address of the Source Appliance.Appliance Address
This is the serial number of the Source Appliance.Serial Number
This field indicates whether the Source Appliance is available.Available
This shows the capacity of the Source Appliance.Capacity
This shows the amount of free space on the Source Appliance.Free Space
This shows the software version of the Source Appliance.software version
Blackout windowsAny blackout windows that have been specified will be reflected in this weekly callDuring these times, the selected Source Appliance is not available for replication.

Source Appliance Permissions tab

Source Appliance Permissions are disabled by default. In this state, there is no control over mapp between share and library devices on the Target and the Source Appliances.

However, if you want to lock down the ability to create share and library mappings so that, when the wizard is run and mappings are configured, the Target only has access to a list of sources that are allowed to replicate to it, click Edit and check the Enabled box.

You will then need to create the list of source appliances and enable share and library permission accordingly.

Status Virtual Tape Mappings NAS Mappings Partner Appliances Local Appliances Event History Partner Appliance Details Target Appliances Source Appliances Source Appliance Permissions Enabled Edit

To add a Source Appliance

When you click Edit and check the Enabled box a list of source appliances is displayed.

There is a wildcard entry in the Source Appliances list that allows you to set permissions across all source appliances. However, you are more likely to want to set permissions for individual appliances.

Click Add. A wizard guides you through the necessary steps to add a new source appliance to the list. You will need to provide the serial number of the appliance and can also specify initial access permissions for all libraries and all shares on that appliance.

Status Virtual Tape Mappings NAS Mappings Partner Appliances Local Appliance Event History Partner Appliance Details Target Appliances Source Appliances Source Appliance Permissions Enabled Edit Source Appliances Add an Appliance's serial number to configure access permissions to shares and libraries Serial Number Appliance Name Appliance Status Appliance Address Configured Mappings All Appliances - - MXQ011096W D2D-MXQ011096W Online 16.26.134.56 Remove Add Permissions Configuring permissions allows you to limit access to libraries and shares. Source Appliances will only be able to configure mappings to libraries and shares which they have been granted access to. Libraries Shares Name Access DPBackupVTL Library 3

Table 23 Source Appliances parameters

Serial NumberThis is the serial number of the source appliance. This information can be found by runn the Web Management Interface on the required appliance and looking at the Summary page.
Appliance NameThis is the name of the appliance for which you have specified the serial number and cannot be altered.
Appliance StatusThis is the status of the appliance for which you have specified the serial number and cannot be altered.
Appliance AddressThis is the address of the appliance for which you have specified the serial number and cannot be altered.
Configured MappingsThis checkbox indicates whether any mappings have been configured on the source appliance. This is important to know, because any mappings that already exist will be retained regardless of any access permissions you subsequently set up for libraries and shares on that appliance.

To enable permissions

  1. Select the source appliance in the list. There are two tabs; one for Libraries and one for S
  2. Click Edit. You can now check the Access box for those shares and libraries to which acc should be granted. These are the shares and libraries that will be displayed when the ma configuration step is run in the Replication wizard. It will not be possible to create a new or library from the wizard.

  3. Click Update to apply the permissions.

Local Appliance (Replication)

This page contains three tabs that show general settings for the HP StoreOnce Backup System, settings for blackout windows and bandwidth limiting settings. These are the tabs that allow you to view and modify information about the appliance whose Web Management Interface you have logged into.

D2D Backup System Home Virtual Tape Devices NAS Configuration Status Replication Administration d2dqukevpic02 : IPV 16; IPV6 3520:9a17-e020:21a-4b Status Virtual Tape Mappings NAS Mappings Partner Appliances Local Appliances Event History Local Appliance Settings General Settings Blackout Windows Appliance Appliance Name d2dqukevpic02 Appliance Status Running Bandwidth Limiting Bandwidth Limiting Enabled Maximum Bandwidth - Maximum WAN Usage % WAN Speed 1Mb/s Maximum Jobs Maximum Concurrent Source Jobs 2 Maximum Concurrent Target Jobs 6 Share Synchronisation Progress Logging Progress Logging Enabled ✓ Log Every 1 Hours Out of Sync Notification Settings Out of Sync Warning 24 Hours Out of Sync Critical 72 Hours Configure Replication Ports Command Protocol Port Number 0387 Data Protocol Port Number 9308 Edit Language English © 2000 Hewlett Packard Company, L.P.

General settings

  1. Select the General Settings tab.
  2. Click Edit to make the fields editable, see table below.
  3. Click Apply to apply the settings.

Table 24 General Settings (Replication)

ApplianceThis shows the name of the appliance and its current status. It also tells you the product class: HP D2D2500, HP D2D4000, HP D2D4106/4112 or HP D2D4312/4324. You can only edit the appliance name. The default name is the network host name of the appliance (as configured in network settings). You may change this to something that is more user friendly and will make it easier to identify the appliance on the replication Web Management Interface of the local and partner appliances. It may be anything that is meaningful to the user, such as the geographical location of the appliance.
Maximum JobsThis is the maximum number of source and target jobs that can run concurrently. If necessary, you can reduce the default value on this page. You may want to decrease the maximum source jobs to avoid using too much WAN bandwidth. You may want to reduce the maximum number of target jobs to avoid overloading the target appliance and reserve appliance performance, if you are running backups or tape offloads at the same time as replication.
Synchronization progress loggingAn event is always generated each time a mapping goes out of sync and goes back into sync. This field applies to periodic sync progress updates whilst the mapping remains out of sync, which results in emails (if emails are configured), but not SNMP traps. Use these fields to enable progress logging for Library and Share synchronization and to specify the logging interval. While the library or share is out of sync emails are sent periodically indicating how many slots or entries are still out of sync. This information is also logged to the user Event Log. One email is sent for each log entry made for each library or share that is out of sync.
Out of Sync Notification SettingsThese fields to specify the amount of time a mapping needs to be out of sync before a sync issue is shown in the Issue tab, and an event is generated, resulting in an entry in the user Event Log, and also an email and/or an SNMP trap if the appliance is configured tosend these. These notifications are in addition to a standard notification email sent whenever a mapping first becomes unsynchronized and another when synchronization is achieved.
Configure ReplicationPortsReplication ports should only be changed if replication is blocked by a router on the WAN They must be the same on both source and target appliances. If in doubt, do NOT chang them.

!

IMPORTANT: If replication needs to take place through a firewall, the network administrator will need to open (TCP) ports 9387 (Command protocol) and 9388 (Data protocol) to allow the replication traffic to pass to and from the HP StoreOnce Backup Systems. If necessary and the StoreOnce Backup Systems conflict with another device on the network, these ports can be checked from the defaults in the General Settings.

Bandwidth limiting

This tab allows you to apply a general bandwidth setting and to configure bandwidth limiting windows.

Bandwidth limiting can be used to avoid saturating the WAN with low bandwidth replication, freeing up bandwidth for other processes and applications that you may have running. A mini of 2Mbps per concurrent job is recommended. At least 512kbps per concurrent job is required for reliable operation. A bandwidth usage calculator is provided to generate a recommended bandwidth limit from WAN speed information and percentage usage information, which is provi in the Maximum WAN Usage and WAN Speed fields. These limits apply to all outbound replication jobs from this local appliance.

  1. Display the Bandwidth Limiting tab.

Status Virtual Tape Mappings NAS Mappings Partner Appliances Local Appliance Event History Local Appliance Settings General Settings Bandwidth Limiting Blackout Windows Status World Wide Port Name is wrong length. World Wide Port Name has invalid characters. Current Bandwidth Limit No Limit General Bandwidth Limit Apply a general bandwidth limit. If enabled, this limit will be used when no limiting windows are active. General Limit Enabled General Bandwidth Limit 0 Kbps Bandwidth Limiting Windows You can apply different bandwidth limits at certain times. When active, these will override the general bandwidth limit System Time Wednesday 10:37 Day Apply First Restriction Bandwidth Limit Start Finish Apply Second Restriction Bandwidth Limit Start Finish Sunday 9 Kbps 00:00 00:00 00:00 0 Kbps 30:00 30:00 Monday 9 Kbps 00:00 00:00 0 Kbps 30:00 30:00 Tuesday 9 Kbps 00:00 00:00 0 Kbps 30:00 30:00 Wednesday 9 Kbps 00:00 00:00 0 Kbps 30:00 30:00 Thursday 9 Kbps 00:00 00:00 0 Kbps 30:00 30:00 Friday 9 Kbps 00:00 00:00 0 Kbps 30:00 30:00 Saturday 9 Kbps 00:00 00:00 0 Kbps 30:00 30:00

  1. Check the General Limiting Enabled box. You can now work out the recommended general bandwidth limit, which is a simple calculation of WAN Speed x Maximum % WAN Usage A bandwidth limit calculator is provided on this page to work out limit values, if required.

  2. Click Edit to edit the Bandwidth Limiting Windows.

You can configure two windows for each day. Be sure to check the appropriate Apply First/Second Restriction checkbox(es). This ensures the times that have been specified are

enabled. If it is not checked, the times are ignored. Then enter the general value you have just calculated for the Recommended Limit in each required window manually.

World Wide Port Name is wrong length. World Wide Port Name has invalid characters. Current Bandwidth Limit No Limit General Bandwidth Limit Apply a general bandwidth limit. It enabled, this limit will be used when no limiting windows are active. General Limit Enabled General Bandwidth Limit 0 Kbps Bandwidth Limiting Windows You can apply different bandwidth limits at certain times. When active, these will override the general bandwidth limit. System Time Wednesday 10:58 Day Apply First Restriction Bandwidth Limit Start Finish Apply Second Restriction Bandwidth Limit Start Finish Sunday 4096 Kbps 02 : 30 : 08 : 00 : 4096 Kbps Monday 0 Kbps 00 : 30 : 59 : 00 : 0 Kbps Tuesday 0 Kbps 00 : 30 : 59 : 00 : 0 Kbps Wednesday 0 Kbps 00 : 30 : 59 : 00 : 0 Kbps Thursday 0 Kbps 00 : 30 : 79 : 00 : 0 Kbps Friday 0 Kbps 00 : 30 : 59 : 00 : 0 Kbps Saturday 0 Kbps 00 : 30 : 59 : 00 : 0 Kbps Cancel Apply

NOTE: All settings are applied to the HP StoreOnce Backup System — you cannot configure settings for individual jobs. The Bandwidth Limit windows override the General Limit when the time specified for the window is active. Outside of Bandwidth Limit windows the General Limit applies.

4. Click Apply.

Blackout windows

This option allows you to specify times when replication should not occur, for example during planned maintenance or heavy network traffic. You may configure multiple blackout windows.

NOTE: This setting relates to the local appliance in its role as a source or target device. No replication jobs will be started if the Source or Target Appliance for a mapping is in blackout, a any running jobs for the mapping will be paused.

  1. Select the Blackout Windows tab.

Status Virtual Tape Mappings IAS Mappings Partner Appliances Local Appliance Event History Local Appliance Settings General Settings Bandwidth Limiting Blackout Windows Configure Blackout Windows System Time Tuesday 03:11 Blackout Window Active No Day Apply First Time Restriction Start Finish Apply Second Time Restriction Start Finish Sunday 01:00 02:00 00:00 00:00 Monday 00:00 00:00 00:00 Tuesday 00:00 00:00 00:00 Wednesday 00:00 00:00 00:00 Thursday 00:00 00:00 00:00 Friday 00:00 00:00 00:00 Saturday 00:00 00:00 Pause Replications Jobs Edit

  1. Click Edit.

  2. Check the box next to the required day of the week.

  3. The time boxes become editable. Use the drop-down menus to select the appropriate hours.

  4. Set up as many blackout windows, as required.

  5. Make sure the Apply First Time Restriction box is checked. This ensures the times that have been specified are enabled. If it is not checked, the times are ignored.

  6. If you want to enable a second blackout window, make sure the Apply Second Time Res box is checked. The second blackout window for each day must occur after the first black window for that day.

  7. Click Apply. If you now look at the Appliance tab, you will notice that the calendar for the Source and Target Appliances reflects the changes you have made.

Pause replication jobs

The Pause Replication Jobs button on the Blackout Windows tab provides an easy way of putting all replication jobs on hold immediately. Click a second time to resume replication jobs.

Event History (Replication)

This page shows the log of all completed replication events on the appliance. Select an event the list to view its details below.

Status Virtual Tape Mapping NAS Mapings Partner Appliances Local Appliance Event History Replication Event Show Search Box Date Time Message Source Name Target Name Source StatusEntry Target StatusEntry Event Category Severity 2008/09/25 16:13 Replication Target Appliance detected Source Appliance making connection - - - - - - - - - Source Appliance Event 2008/09/25 16:13 Replication Source Appliance detected Target Appliance making connection - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2008/09/25 16:13 Replication Source Appliance detected Target Appliance making connection - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2008/09/25 16:13 Replication Target Appliance detected Source Appliance making connection - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2008/09/25 16:10 Replication Target Appliance detected Source Appliance breaking connection - - - - - - - 16:10 Replication Target Appliance detected Source Appliance breaking connection - 16:09 Replication Source Appliance detected Target Appliance making connection - 16:09 Replication Target Appliance detected Source Appliance making connection - 16:08 Replication Target Appliance detected Source Appliance making connection - 16:07 Replication Target Appliance detected Source Appliance breaking connection - 16:06 Replication Target Appliance detected Source Appliance breaking connection - 16:05 Replication Target Appliance detected Source Appliance breaking connection - 16:04 Replication Target Appliance detected Source Appliance breaking connection - 16:03 Replication Target Appliance detected Source Appliance breaking connection - 16:02 Replication Target Appliance detected Source Appliance breaking connection - 16:01 Replication Target Appliance detected Source Appliance breaking connection - 16:00 Replication Target Appliance detected Source Appliance breaking connection - 16:09 Replication Target Appliance detected Source Appliance breaking connection - 16:08 Replication Target Appliance detected Source Appliance breaking connection - 16:07 Replication Target Appliance detected Source Appliance breaking connection - 16:06 Replication Target Appliance detected Source Appliance breaking connection - 16:05 Replication Target Appliance detected Source Appliance breaking connection - 16:04 Replication Target Appliance detected Source Appliance breaking connection - 16:03 Replication Target Appliance detected Source Appliance breaking connection - 16:02 Replication Target Appliance detected Source Appliance breaking connection - 16:01 Replication Target Appliance detected Source Appliance breaking connection - 16:00 Replication Target Appliance detected Source Appliance breaking connection - 16:09 Replication Target Appliance detected Source Appliance breaking connection - 16:08 Replication Target Appliance detected Source Appliance breaking connection - 16:07 Replication Target Appliance detected Source Appliance breaking connection - 16:06 Replication Target Appliance detected Source Appliance breaking connection

This page presents a time and date stamped list of significant replication events with severity s and associated messages. The most recent information is shown at the top of the list.

- Select an event in the list to view its details below.

•The Clear Event History button may be used to clear the list.

•The History will be maintained if the HP StoreOnce Backup System is power cycled.

Sorting and searching the event history

Click on any column heading to sort messages according to that criterion. For example, click Date to sort the messages according to date.

Click on Show Search Box to display a Filter field and two drop-down menus. Use the right-hand drop-down menu to filter on Severity, for example to display all Error messages. Use the middle drop-down menu to select a column (or All) and the type a search string into the Filter box.

8 Administration

The Administration menu allows you to configure basic appliance settings, such as date and time and licenses. The following options are available.

-User Account (Administration)
•Security (Administration)
•Date and Time (Administration)
•Housekeeping (Administration)
- Shutdown (Administration)
•Software (Administration)
•Support (Administration)
• Backup and Restore (Administration)
•License (Administration)

User Account (Administration)

This page allows you to manage the Administrator's password. It also includes sections for configuring the amount of idle time before a user is automatically logged off and for disabling/enabling the welcome message pop-up screen.

User Account Security Date & Time Housekeeping Shutdown Firmware Support Backup & Restore Licenses Change Administrator Password Password for Administration is set to the default password. Change Inactive Logout Timer Configure the amount of idle time the GUI will wait before logging the current user out. Inactivity Timeout: 20 Minute(s) Edit Welcome Message Enable or Disable the Welcome dialog which is displayed when a user logs into the D2D. Enabled: No Enable

Password

When you first log on the Administrator user has a password of Admin. For security reasons, you may wish to change this.

  • Click Edit to make the fields editable.
    • Make the required changes and click Update to apply the changes (or Cancel to discard them). The new password must have at least 8 characters.

NOTE: The password that you configure on this page is also the password that is required when accessing the HP StoreOnce Backup System configuration from the system console.

Resetting the password

If you forget your password, you can reset the HP StoreOnce Backup System as follows:

NOTE: Resetting the password will reset the networking settings to the factory defaults and reset the Administrator password to Admin. No user data will be lost.

Procedure 6

  1. Make sure nobody is using the HP StoreOnce Backup System before you attempt the reset.
  2. Press the Power button on the front of the HP StoreOnce Backup System three times in quick succession.

Approximately 5 seconds later the HP StoreOnce Backup System will reboot.

  1. Use the device Discovery tool on the HP StoreOnce Backup System CD-ROM to re-configure the network settings of the HP StoreOnce Backup System. You can also use the console so

Inactive Logout Time

It is possible to set an amount of idle time, in minutes, before a user is automatically logged Click Edit and amend, as required.

Welcome Message

The Welcome Message is automatically displayed whenever the software is upgraded; it is a way of drawing the user's attention to changes and new features. Click Disable to disable the Welcome Message. Alternatively, you can click Don't show again on the Welcome Message itself. Once disabled, you must use the Enable button on the User Account page to reinstate it.

Security (Administration)

By default, the HP StoreOnce Backup System generates a generic SSL certificate, which means that it is not unique to the HP StoreOnce Backup System. So, when you log onto the HP Stor Backup System for the first time from a host, certificate errors are displayed. It is safe to cont but you will have a Certificate Error reported in the navigation bar.

Certificate Error: Verification Checked - Windows Internet Explorer File Edit View Favorites Tools Help Favorites: Supported Web → Help Email Letters Certificate Error: Authentication Checked There is a problem with this website's security certificate. The security certificate presented by this website was not issued by a trusted certificate authority. The security certificate presented by this website was issued for a different website's address. Security certificate problems may indicate an attempt to feel you or intercept any data you send to the server. We recommend that you close this webpage and do not continue to this website. Click here to close this webpage. Continue to this website (not recommended). More information

This page allows you to create a self-signed SSL certificate, after you have logged on. This will prevent the certificate errors being displayed in future because the certificate has not been signed by a trusted certificate authority, but any attempts to spoof the HP StoreOnce web site using a different certificate will fail. (The SSL certificate info in the Web Management Interface will always show the values of the default SSL certificate, not the content of the generated SSL.)

D2D Backup System Home Virtual Tape Devices NAS Configuration Status Replication Administration D2DBS-CZ09205GJK: IPV 16.2 IPV 2620.0.a17.w020.223.7d1 Status Password Security Date & Time Shutdown Firmware Support Backup & Restore Licenses Security SSL Certificate SSL Certificate Using User Generated Certificate Common Name 18.26 Unit Name StorageWorks Company Name Organization vP Locality Name (eg City) Bristol State or Province Name Bristol Country Code OK Email Address support@hp.com Challenge Password Number of Days Valid 365 Reset Generate

  1. The Using User Generated Certificate check box is blank when this feature is not yet enabled..

  2. Provide the relevant information, as described below.

Table 25 Security parameters

The host name or IP address of the HP StoreOnce Backup System.Common Name
Your section name within your company.Unit Name
Your company name.Organisation
Your city.Locality
Your state or province name.State or Province Name
Select the appropriate two-character identifier from the drop-down box.Country Code
Email AddressYour email address.
Number of days validThe certificate will expire after this number of days and an error will be displayed in the web browser.
  1. Click on Generate.

  2. Once generated, the HP StoreOnce Backup System will restart its web server and re-display the login page. Certificate errors will still be present, but this time the certificate contains valid and unique data.

  3. You can now install this certificate into the web browser on the host system. The web brow will no longer issue the initial error web page when you log in, but the "Certificate Error message will still be present on the navigation bar.

Figure 5 Generic certificate information
Certificate General Details Certification Path Certificate Information This CA Root certificate is not trusted. To enable trust, Install this certificate in the Trusted Root Certification Authorities store. Issued to: HP StorageWorks D2D Backup System Issued by: HP StorageWorks D2D Backup System Valid from 08/04/2008 to 06/04/2018 Install Certificate... Issuer Statement... OK

Figure 6 User generated certificate information
Certificate General Details Certification Path Certificate Information This CA Root certificate is not trusted. To enable trust, install this certificate in the Trusted Root Certification Authorities store. Issued to: 16.26.130.198 Issued by: 16.26.130.198 Valid from: 24/11/2009 to 24/11/2010 Install Certificate... Issue Statement OK

Date & Time (Administration)

This page allows you to view and manage the following settings:

• Date and time settings
- Date display format
• Network Time Protocol (NTP) settings
•Daylight saving settings

Password Date & Time Shutdown Firmware Support Backup & Restore Licenses Date & Time Time 16 21 Date 25 September 2009 Edit Date Display Format Configure the display format of short dates which appear in Replication and System Event logs Date Format YYYY/MM/DD Edit NTP Status ① The NTP process is disabled NTP Enabled □ Address Enabled Server 1 □ Server 2 □ Server 3 □ Edit Daylight Saving Daylight Saving Enabled □ Current Location (GMT) Europe/London Edit

Date & Time settings

These fields provide the ability to manually set the date and time. They can only be edited if the NTP process is disabled.

Date Display format

Click Edit to change the way the date format is displayed in Replication and System Event logs. Select the desired format from the drop-down menu and click Update.

Network Time Protocol (NTP) settings

Network Time Protocol (NTP) provides support for automatic time synchronization. If you are using an Active Directory Service domain controller, it is important to synchronize the StoreOnce appliance's real-time clock with the same time source as that of the Active Directory Server.

NOTE: If you enable NTP, you cannot configure date and time manually and you must set the Current Location correctly to ensure that local time is correct

  • Check the NTP Enabled box and provide the IP address or fully qualified domain name of an NTP server on the local network.
    It is possible to synchronize the HP StoreOnce Backup System with up to three NTP servers. If you are using Windows Active Directory, one of these should be either the domain control server or an NTP server that the domain controller is also using to synchronize its time. Provid multiple NTP servers ensures that a single server failing or getting out of sync will not affect the time on the HP StoreOnce system.
  • Be sure to check the box next to each of the servers to enable.

IMPORTANT: If the NTP server (for automatic date and time update) fails to connect to the server for any reason, it will fail and stop the NTP server. If this happens an email alert will be sent at the user must manually restart NTP from the Web Management Interface.

Daylight Saving

By default, the HP StoreOnce Backup System does not make any automatic adjustments for daylight saving time. Use this section to enable daylight saving and also view the current time zone/locatic

Time zones that have half-hour increments (rather than full-hour increments) are fully supported. The 0.5 hour time zone increment is not shown in the Current Location drop-down list (for exc Australia/Darwin and Australia/Adelaide are shown as GMT+9, rather than GMT+9.5), but the correct adjustments are made.

Users in locations that are on 0.5 hour time zone increments and that do not participate in E Savings Adjustments, such as Australia/Darwin and Asia/Calcutta, must enable Daylight Savings for the correct local time to be shown.

Housekeeping (Administration)

IMPORTANT: Housekeeping is an important process in order to maximize the deduplication efficiency of the appliance and, as such, it is important to ensure that it has enough time to run. Running backup, restore, tape offload and replication operations with no break (i.e. 24 hours day) will result in housekeeping never being able to complete. This is a complex subject. We strongly recommend that you read HP StoreOnce Backup Systems best practices for VTL, Replication implementations that is available on http://www.hp.com/support/manuals for more detailed guidance.

This page shows current housekeeping activity, as a graph, and allows you to configure black windows for housekeeping. The graph can be toggled from a Day to a Week view; the exam shows the Day view.

HP StoreOnce G2 - Housekeeping (Administration) - 1

bar Showing: Overall Housekeeping Load (30 Oct 13.00 - 08 Nov 11.00) | Metric | Jobs Received | Jobs Processed | | :--- | :--- | :--- | | 01 Nov | 5 | 6 | | 02 Nov | 4 | 3 | | 03 Nov | 3 | 2 | | 04 Nov | 2 | 1 | | 05 Nov | 3 | 2 | | 06 Nov | 4 | 3 | | 07 Nov | 5 | 4 | | 08 Nov | 6 | 5 | | High | 12 | 1 | Housekeeping Statistics Status OK Last Idle 8-Nov-2010 12:17 Time Idle (Last 24 Hours) 100% Time Idle (Last 7 Days) 83%

Using the graph

The graph is displayed when the Overall tab is selected; it shows the overall activity for the HP StoreOnce Backup Appliance. Two additional tabs allow you to view activity for libraries and shares.

Use the Housekeeping Statistics to check the status.

  • OK means that housekeeping has been idle and, therefore, not likely to have been impacting on backup or replication performance.
  • Warning means that housekeeping has not been idle in the last 24 hours.
  • Caution means that housekeeping has not been idle in the last 7 days

A status of either Warning or Caution requires further investigation because it will be affecting backup and replication performance.

Configuring blackout windows

Scheduling housekeeping blackout windows to cover the period during which backups are occurring can significantly improve backup performance.

Click Edit and enter the appropriate times for each window. Make sure the Apply First Time Restriction box is checked. This ensures the times that have been specified are enabled. If it is not checked, the times are ignored.

You may configure a maximum of two windows for each day. Settings apply to all devices on the HP StoreOnce Backup System.

#

TIP: Ideally, housekeeping blackout windows should be set for those times when the HP StoreOnce Backup System is running backup or replication. See the D2D Best Practices for VTL, Replication implementations for recommendations.

NAS ai

Pausing housekeeping

Click Pause Housekeeping to pause housekeeping altogether (perhaps while you decide how best to configure blackout windows). This setting applies to all devices, libraries and shares on the HP StoreOnce Backup System. It is not retained if there is a power failure or the HP StoreOnce Back System is powered down.

Housekeeping should not be left in the paused state for significant amounts of time; use it only a test tool.

Shutdown (Administration)

This option allows you to shut down the HP StoreOnce Backup System cleanly. It is the only recommended way of powering off the device. If you remove the power in any other way and a host is carrying out a backup or restore, you may lose or corrupt data.

Click Power Off and Yes to confirm.

Password Date & Time Shutdown Firmware Support Backup & Restore Licenses Shutdown Power Off Restart

!

WARNING! Before shutting down always ensure that there are no backup or restore jobs in progress and that no future jobs are scheduled to start whilst the system is shut down. If hosts do not automatically reconnect to the HP StoreOnce Backup System when it restarts, you must reconn manually from the iSCSI Initiator on each host, see the HP StoreOnce Backup System Installation and Configuration Guide.

Software (Administration)

This page provides information about the software version of your HP StoreOnce Backup System and its build date. It also allows you to upgrade the software and the language pack. Whenever

you upgrade software, there will be a welcome message in the Web Management Interface th summarizes all the changes in this upgrade.

!

IMPORTANT: Once you have upgraded your software, you will not be able to revert to the earlier version. Always read the Release Notes accompanying the software upgrade carefully to check that the upgrade is compatible with your configuration.

IMPORTANT: Software can only be upgraded from a maximum of two previous revisions; attempting to upgrade from a version any older will fail with an error message and the software will not be upgraded. If you wish to upgrade from an older version, you must first upgrade to appropriate newer reversion, reboot and then upgrade again.

Software updates for all versions can be downloaded from http://www.hp.com/support/downloads.

User Account Security Date & Time Housekeeping Shutdown Software Support Backup & Restore Licenses Software Type HP StorageWorks 0204312 - G2 Software Revision 2.1.09-0909707 Build Date 2010/12/21 09:00 Upgrade Click here to check for latest software revisions. Language Pack Language Pack Version Language Pack Not Installed Upgrade

NOTE: You may also receive notification of upgrades to system components, such as hard drives and BIOS, from time to time, independently of upgrades to the HP StoreOnce Backup Software. Use the Support page to check the current status of these components and determine whether an upgrade is required.

Language Pack

The Language Pack contains all the translations for the Web Management Interface and message that are displayed when using it. This includes the online help.

Whenever new software is released, there may also be changes to the screens and messages. is, therefore, very important to make sure that these are downloaded at the same time as the software is updated. The software upgrade removes all language packs, so a new language p is always required to get localized languages and ensure that everything is up to date.

Identifying the correct software for your product

It is important to select the correct software for your product. There are two generations of HF StoreOnce Backup Systems. Sometimes it is easy to identify the generation from the model nun sometimes it is less easy.

• HP D2D2503i, HP D2D4004/4009i/fc are only available as G1 products
• HP D2D4106i/fc and HP D2D4312 are only available as G2 products
- HP D2D2502i, HP D2D2504i and HP D2D4112 are available as both G1 and G2 products. The generation can be identified from the Summary page and the Software page of the Web Management Interface. Look at the Type field, which will state G1 or G2 or look at the Software Revision field. If it shows 1.x.xx software, it is a G1 product; if it shows 2.x.xx software, it is a G2 product.

Upgrading the software

  1. Check http://www.hp.com/support for the latest software (you can do this by selecting the link on the Software page) and download it to your hard disk.
  2. Read the Release Notes accompanying the software upgrade and confirm that it is compatible with your StoreOnce configuration. You will not be able to revert to earlier software after running the upgrade.
  3. Select Software from the Web Management Interface and click Upgrade in the Software section of the page.
  4. Make sure that there are no backup or restore jobs in progress and that no future jobs are scheduled to start whilst the software is upgrading. Click Yes.

Firmware Are you sue you want to upgrade FW now? Any backup/restore jobs in progress will fail. Cancel OK

  1. Click Browse... and locate the upload file that you have just downloaded.

Upload Firmware Select firmware file to upload Browse... Cancel Upload

  1. Click Upload to upgrade the software. A progress meter is displayed while the upgrade takes place. The system will reboot once it has been updated. Configuration information and data are unaffected by this process.

HP StoreOnce G2 - Upgrading the software - 3

WARNING! Once you have started to upgrade the software, it is important that you allow it to complete. Do not attempt to cancel the upgrade process, or power off the machine.

!

IMPORTANT: We strongly recommend that you upgrade the language pack immediately after upgrading the software. The software upgrade removes all language packs, so a new language pack is always required to get localized languages and ensure that everything is up to date. If y do not download the language pack, all message strings, online help and screen prompts will be in English only.

Upgrading the language pack

NOTE: The supported languages are English, French, German, Spanish, Portuguese, Russian, Japanese and Simplified Chinese.

  1. Check http://www.hp.com/support for the latest language pack (you can do this by selecting the link on the Software page) and download it to your hard disk.
  2. Select software from the Web Management Interface and click Upgrade in the Language Pack section of this page.

Upload Language Pack Select file to upload Browse... Cancel Uploads

NOTE: Online help is also included in this pack.

  1. Click Browse... and locate the upload file that you have just downloaded.
  2. Click Upload to upgrade the language pack. On successful completion the following messa is displayed.

Install Language Pack Language Pack Successfully installed

  1. Click OK. All screen fields and messages will now be correct for all languages.

Support (Administration)

Use this page to view system information and to generate and download a support ticket.

User Account Security Date & Time Housekeeping Shutdown Software Support Backup & Restore Licenses System Information Backplane Software Version Click Here for Information Physical Disks Click Here for Information Component Supported Version Installed Version Motherboard Bios Version 05/05/2011 05/05/2011 Version P63 Smart Array Controller Version (Slett) 5.80 5.80 Smart Array Controller Version (Slett) 5.80 5.80 Smart Array Controller Version (Slett) 5.80 5.80 Backplane Firmware Version 2.10 2.10 10Gb Ethernet Version 4.1.450.16 4.1.450.16 1Gb Ethernet Version 4.0.590 4.0.590 Support Ticket Use this page to generate a support ticket. At the prompt save the file to disk. If you have problems, HP Support will ask you to generate this information to help with troubleshooting. It provides a log of what has happened on your system. Note: Please ensure that your browser security settings allow files to be transferred from the HP D2D Backup System to your host machine. No Support Ticket has been generated Downloaded Support Ticket Generate Support Ticket Go to HP Support

System information

This section provides information about the following components within the HP StoreOnce Back System:

  • Motherboard BIOS
    •Smart array controller(s) version
    • Ethernet card(s) versions
    • Expansion shelf/shelves versions

• Backplane software version (and a link for further information on the Status-Shelves page)
•Physical disk versions (this is a link to the Status-RAID page)

For each component, the current installed version is listed as well as the current supported version so that you can determine whether an upgrade is required. If the installed version is out-of-date, this will be flagged for your attention. All component firmware versions can be updated at once

with the D2D Component Firmware ISO image. The latest version of the ISO image is available from http://www.hp.com.

IMPORTANT: It is essential that when you upgrade your software to the latest version, you also update all component firmware.

Support ticket

If you have problems, HP Support will ask you to generate a support ticket to help with troubleshooting. It provides a log of everything that has happened on your system.

NOTE: Please ensure that your browser security settings allow files to be transferred from the HP StoreOnce Backup System to your host machine.

  1. Click Generate Support Ticket to create a support ticket.
  2. The ticket generation will start and display a progress meter.

User Account Security Date & Time Housekeeping Shutdown Software Support Backup & Restore Licenses System Information Motherboard Bio Version 10/16/2007 Version O13 Smart Array Controller Version (1) 4.12 Physical Disks Click Here for Information Support Ticket Use this page to generate a support ticket. At the prompt save the file to disk. If you have problems, HP Support will ask you to generate this information to help with troubleshooting. It provides a tag of what has happened on your system. Note: Please ensure that your browser security settings allow files to be transferred from the HP D2D Backup System to your host machine. Canorating Support Ticket Starting collecting tickets... (1%) Download Support Ticket Generate Support Ticket Go to HP Support

NOTE: If a support ticket had already been created and not downloaded before you created the new support ticket, a warning is issued. Either click Continue to overwrite the existing support ticket or click Cancel and download the existing support ticket first.

User Account Security Date & Time Supportkeeping Shutdown Software Support Backup & Home Store Licensee System Information Motherboard Blog Version 10/16/2007 Version O13 Smart Array Controller Version (1) 4.12 Physical Disks Click Here for Information Support Ticket Use this page to generate a support ticket. At the prompt save the file to date, if you have problems, HP Support will ask you to generate the information to help with troublebackoff. If provide a log of what has happened on your system. Note: Please ensure that your browser security settings allow files to be transferred from the HP HDD Back ● Support Ticket successfully generated (4 April 2012: 7:38) Downset Support Ticket Generate Support Ticket Go to HP Support Generate Support Ticket The existing ticket will be overwritten. Cancel Continue

  1. Once completed, a status is provided along with a Date and Time when the ticket was generated, and the Download Support Ticket button is enabled.

User Account Security Date & Time Housekeeping Shutdown Software Support Backup & Restore Licenses System Information Motherboard Bio Version 10/16/2007 Version 013 Smart Array Controller Version (1) 4.12 Physical Disk Click Here for Information Support Ticket Use this page to generate a support ticket. At the prompt save the file to disk. If you have problems, HP Support will ask you to generate this information to help with troubleshooting. It provides a log of what has happened on your system. Note: Please ensure that your browser security settings allow files to be transferred from the HP Q2D Backup System to your host machine. ● Support Ticket successfully generated (4 April 2012, 7:38) Download Support Ticket Generate Support Ticket Go to HP Support

NOTE: If there is an issue with the ticket being generated, a partial ticket may be created.

  1. Click Download Support Ticket to save the file to disk.

Backup & Restore (Administration)

This tab allows you to save the HP StoreOnce Backup System's configuration settings by downloading them to the host system. If the HP StoreOnce Backup System or the host is repair or replaced, the configuration settings can be restored. It is also possible to restore an HP Store Backup System to factory settings, if a critical failure cannot be resolved by any other means. should normally only be done, if advised to do so by HP Customer Support.

Password Date & Time Shutdown Firmware Support Backup & Restore Licenses Backup Configuration It is possible to save the HP D2D's configuration file by downloading it to the host system. If the HP D2D is repaired or replaced, the configuration file can be uploaded to restore the system. Export Restore Configuration Import Reset to Factory Defaults Reset

Recommendations

Certain combinations of hardware failure will result in the need to recover configuration setting. It is strongly recommended that you export the configuration file:

  • Once you have initially configured the HP StoreOnce Backup System and the configuration is stable
    • Whenever you change the configuration
    • Before you upgrade the software
  • Immediately after upgrading software
    • Before you change any hardware component

NOTE: Configuratin files generated on old software will not be compatible after software upgrade, so a new configuration file must be taken after software update.

Backing up the configuration file

  1. Click on Export to create the configuration file.
  2. At the prompt, select Save to disk.

Restoring the configuration file

It is only possible to restore configuration files when there is no other configuration present; resetti to factory defaults can be used to achieve this.

  1. Click on Import to upload the configuration file.
  2. You will be warned that this will override at current settings. Click OK to continue.
  3. At the prompt, locate the configuration file and click Upload to complete the process. This restores the following configuration parameters:

•network settings
• virtual tape device configuration
- email alert settings
- fibre channel settings, if your model supports FC
- date and time settings

Resetting factory defaults

Only use this feature, if advised to do by Support and there is no other way of restoring the system to a known-good state. It erases all user data and deletes all configuration details and license information. It resets the system and puts it in a state ready to create storage.

License (Administration)

Licensing is used to enable optional product functionality, such as capacity upgrades and replication. The Licenses page shows you a list of the features that are available for your product and wheth they have been enabled and licensed. Most features are only enabled when they are licensed. If you have purchased a feature that requires a license, you will receive a license entitlement certificate with your product. This is a paper document that contains all the information you need to obtain your unique License to Use (LTU) key. If you have Internet access, you can obtain the key from the HP Webware site by connecting to the web address specified on the certificate and following the instructions on the web. (Users without Internet access may use the contact numbers provided with the entitlement certificate.)

You will be required to enter the product's serial number when you request a License to Use key.

More about replication licensing

Replication is a licensed feature. Each HP StoreOnce Backup System that will be used as a Target Appliance must have a Replication license activated.

More about capacity upgrade licensing

The capacity of the HP D2D2500 Series Backup System cannot be upgraded.

The HP StoreOnce Backup System is supplied with eleven hot-plug RAID disks and an online spare disk (in bay 12 (HP D2D4100 Series) or in bay 1 (HP D2D4300 Series). The Capacity Upgrade Kit provides an additional eleven hot-plug +1 online spare disks. The HP 4100 Series allows connection of one Capacity Upgrade Kit; the HP D2D4300 Series allows connection of up to three capacity upgrade kits. You cannot use the disks in the Capacity Upgrade Kit until they are licensed

IMPORTANT: When you add the Capacity Upgrade Kit, the HP StoreOnce Backup System goes offline while the RAID is expanded.

The capacity of the HP D2D2500 Series Backup System cannot be upgraded.

To apply the license key

  1. Obtain the unique License to Use key, as instructed on the License Entitlement Certificate. This is normally from the HP Licensing website at http://www.webware.hp.com. We recommend that you select the option to save the license to a .DAT file. The file can also be emailed the registered license owner's email address or you can use Cut and Paste to copy it to temporary file.
  2. Select the License page From the Web Management Interface to display a list of licensable features.
  3. Select the feature that you wish to license and click in the checkbox to enable it. If you have saved the LTU as a .DAT file, click Upload license file and use the Browse option to file. If you used email or a temporary file, cut and paste the string exactly as you obtain from the HP Licensing website and click Enter LTU string. It is not advised to try and key in the LTU manually. The key is specific to the HP StoreOnce Backup System and cannot be transferred.

Password Date & Time Shutdown Firmware Support Backup & Restore Licenses Licenses Name Description Enabled Licensed Replication This enables libraries to be replication targets Second Shelf This enables disks in a second shelf to be used Enter LTU String Upload license file Language English © 2009 Hewlett-Packard Company, LP.

NOTE: If you are expanding the RAID disk capacity in an HP D2D4000 Series product, you be prompted to reboot your system.

9 Restore processes with replication

In this chapter:

•Recovering a source appliance, VTL devices
•Recovering a source appliance, NAS shares

Recovering a Source Appliance (Virtual Tape devices)

! :

If you replace the disks in the source StoreOnce Backup System and keep the original appliance, the source to target mapping will still exist on the repaired StoreOnce Backup System. You MUST break this mapping BEFORE carrying out recovery. If you do not, the now blank Source Library (on the replacement disks) will overwrite the data on the Target Library. You will effectively lose backup data on both Source and Target Libraries.

Reverse replication using the wizard

The remote site has lost both the host servers and the StoreOnce system. New hardware has been purchased and installed and the administrator now wants to recover data to the StoreOnce Backup System and then restore to the host server. Before the failure a mapping existed between a Source Library on the remote site StoreOnce Backup System and a Target Library on the Data Center StoreOnce Backup System. After the failure the Source Library is missing; the mapping may or may not still exist.

Figure 7 Recovery using reverse replication
HP StoreOnce G2 - Reverse replication using the wizard - 1

flowchart
graph TD
    subgraph Remote Site A
        A1["Host A"] --> D2D2500
        A2["Host B"] --> D2D2500
        D2D2500 --> DataCenter
    end
    subgraph Remote Site B
        B1["Host A"] --> D2D2500
        B2["Host B"] --> D2D2500
        B3["Replacement Host A"] --> D2D2500
        B4["Replacement Host B"] --> D2D2500
        D2D2500 --> DataCenter
    end
    D2D2500 --> DataCenter
    D2D2500 --> DataCenter
    DataCenter --> DataCenter
    style Remote Site A fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style Remote Site B fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style DataCenter fill:#ccf,stroke:#333
  1. Create a new Non-Replicating Library on the Source Appliance (either by running the Installation wizard or by using the Devices page).
  2. Go to the Replication - Virtual Tape Mappings page and select the new non-replicating library.
  3. Click Start Recovery Wizard.

Status Virtual Tape Mappings WAS Mappings Partner Appliances Local Appliance Event History Local Libraries Library Name Role Status User Data Stored Size On Link Mapped Slots Total Slots Device Type Library Version Replication Status Library 1 Non Replicating Online 176.0 GB 10.7 GB - 24 MSL 03 Series (2x24) / LTOS Library 2 Non Replicating Online 176.3 GB 14.3 GB - 24 MSL 03 Series (2x24) / LTOS Library 7 Replication Source Online - - 24 24 MSL 03 Series (2x24) / LTOS Library 8 Replication Target Online - - 24 24 MSL 03 Series (2x24) / LTOS Library 1 Configure a new slot mapping between the selected local library and a library on a target appliance. Start Replication Wizard Map the local library as a source library and recover cartridges from the target. Start Recovery Wizard

  1. At the Select Target Appliance Step, select Add the Target Appliance and provide the IP address of the previous replication target device..

Virtual Tape Recovery Wizard Welcome Select Target Appliance Select Target Library Select Slot Mapping To Adopt (Optiona) Edit Slot Mapping Summary Step 1 - Select Target Appliance The purpose of this site is to select the appliance which mouse the desired partner library. Select Target Appliance + Click to show/halo details box Appliance Name Appliance Address Serial Number Free Space Online Protocol Version D20 CZ03018NY 7 TB Online Version 2 Rod Target Appliance Library 1 Library 2 Library 3 Library 4 Library 5 Library 6 Library 7 Library 8 Library 9 Library 10 < Back Next > Cancel Help

  1. Select the existing Target Library, or the Non-Replicating Library that was the Target Library before mapping was broken, from which slots should be recovered.

Step 2 - Select Target Library The purpose of this slot is to select the desired partner library. If you select a library which is Select Target Library + Click to show hide details box Library Name Role Status Slot Mappings Mapped Slots Total Slots Library Version Library 1 Non Replicating Online - - 24 1 Library 2 Non Replicating Online - - 24 1 Library 7 Restoration Source Online 1 24 24 1 Library 8 Restoration Target Online 1 24 24 1 < Back Next > Cancel Help

  1. If it is an existing Target Library, adopt the Slot Mapping that had been configured. If the mapping had been broken and the library has reverted to Non-Replicating, create a new slot mapping. All slots in the Target Library will be selected by default, but you may deselect any cartridges that you do not wish to recover to the Source Library.

Click Adopt to run reverse replication.

Virtual Tape Recovery Wizard Step 3 - Select Slot Mapping To Adopt (Optional) The purpose of this step is to select which existing slot mapping you wish to adopt. Existing Slot Mappings Slot Mapping Name Source Appliance Name Source Appliance Address Source Appliance Serial Number Source Library Name Source Online Slot Mapping 1 CZ06301BNY Add Slot Mapping Add Slot Mapping Library 1 Library 2 Library 7 Library 8 Library 9 Library 10 Welcome Select Target Appliance Select Target Library Select Slot Mapping To Adopt (Optional) Edit Slot Mapping Summary Library 1 Back Next > Cancel Help

If the Target Library supports multiple library Fan In, the library may still be a Replication Target if other mappings exist. You can now recover by adding the mapping back to map the unmapped slots to the new Source Library.

Local Libraries Virtual Tape Repocery Wizard Summary Welcome Select Target Appliance Select Target Library Select Slot Mapping To Adopt (Optional) Edit Slot Mapping Summary Summary Slot Mapping Name Slot Mapping 1 Source Library Library 1 on Local Appliance Target Library Library 8 on Appliance B20- CZ03019MY Source Slot Cartridge Barcode Target Slot Cartridge Barcode Recover First Slot 1 77A00T27 Slot 1 7555307D ✓ Slot 2 77A00T28 Slot 2 7555307E ✓ Slot 3 77A00T29 Slot 3 7555307F ✓ Slot 4 77A00T2A Slot 4 75553080 ✓ Slot 5 77A00T2B Slot 5 75553081 ✓ Slot 6 77A00T2C Slot 6 75553082 ✓ Slot 7 77A00T2D Slot 7 75553083 ✓ Slot 8 77A00T2E Slot 8 75553084 ✓ Slot 9 77A00T2F Slot 9 75553085 ✓ Slot 10 77A00T30 Slot 10 75553086 ✓ Slot 11 77A00T31 Slot 11 75553087 ✓ Slot 12 77A00T32 Slot 12 75553088 ✓ Slot 13 77A00T33 Slot 13 75553089 ✓ Slot 14 77A00T34 Slot 14 7555308A ✓ Slot 15 77A00T35 Slot 15 7555308B ✓ Slot 16 77A00T36 Slot 16 7555308C ✓ Slot 17 77A00T37 Slot 17 7555308D ✓ Slot 18 77A00T38 Slot 18 7555308E ✓ Slot 19 77A00T39 Slot 19

  1. As soon as reverse replication has completed for each slot, the data may be recovered to host using the original backup application.
  2. New backups can now run to the Source Appliance and replication will run normally with further configuration.

Figure 8 Reverse replication process: source lost
HP StoreOnce G2 - Reverse replication using the wizard - 7

flowchart
graph TD
    A["Start"] --> B["Create non-replicating library on new source appliance."]
    B --> C["On the Mapping Configuration page select the new non-replicating library on the source appliance."]
    C --> D["Select Start Recovery Wizard."]
    C --> E["Add IP address or FQDN of the target appliance that was used as previous replication target."]
    C --> F["Select library to use for recovery (may still be target or non-replicating if mapping was broken)."]
    C --> G["Adopt previously configured slot mapping or create new one, if mapping broken."]
    C --> H["All cartridges on the target are selected. Unselect any that are not required for recovery."]
    C --> I["Select Apply to start reverse replication."]
    C --> J["As soon as reverse replication has completed for each slot use original backup application to recover data to the host."]
    J --> K["New backups to the source device and replication can now run normally."]
    K --> L["End"]

Promoting a Target Library over the WAN using iSCSI

The remote site has lost both the host servers and the StoreOnce system. New server hardware has been purchased and installed and the admin now wants to recover data to the server. The admin has not installed a new StoreOnce Backup System and is going to recover data directly to the server from the Data Center StoreOnce Backup System over the WAN (which will take a long time).

NOTE: The procedure described below retains the ability to back up to the Target Library. If this is not required, a simpler solution may be to make the Target Library visible (but read-only), see Backup applications and Replication Target libraries (page 16).

Figure 9 Recovery by promoting a Target Library
HP StoreOnce G2 - Promoting a Target Library over the WAN using iSCSI - 1

flowchart
graph TD
    subgraph Remote Site A
        A1["Host A"] --> D2D2500
        A2["Host B"] --> D2D2500
        D2D2500 --> DataCenter
    end
    subgraph Remote Site B
        B1["Host A"] --> D2D2500
        B2["Host B"] --> D2D2500
        B3["Replacement Host A"] --> DataCenter
        B4["Replacement Host B"] --> DataCenter
    end
    D2D2500 -.-> DataCenter
    D2D4000 -.-> DataCenter
    D2D4000 -.-> DataCenter

Before the failure a mapping existed between a Source Library on the remote site StoreOnce Backup System and a Target Library on the Data Center StoreOnce Backup System. After the failure the mapping still exists but the Source Library is missing. The Target Library on the Data Center StoreOnce Backup System is still in Target Library mode, it has not had its mappings removed.

IMPORTANT: This recovery method is not suitable if the Target Library also has slot mappings from Source Libraries on other remote sites.

  1. On the Target Appliance in the Data Center, go to the Replication - Mapping Configuration page, select the Target Library and remove the slot mapping between it and the lost Source Library.

  2. As long as there is only one slot mapping to the Target Library, it will become a Non-Replicating Library.

NOTE: If there are other mappings, do not remove them if it will break other library replication. Do not proceed, this method is not suitable.

  1. Edit the port configuration of the newly promoted Non-Replicating Library to make it iSCSI.

  2. Install the iSCSI initiator on the host machine at the remote site where recovery is to occur an install the backup application.

  3. Configure the iSCSI Initiator Name for the newly promoted Non-Replicating Library to be that of the host system.

  4. Connect to the Data Center appliance and library via iSCSI from the host at the remote site.

  5. Import the cartridges into the backup application and recover the data over the WAN.

  6. At this point there is no HP StoreOnce Source Appliance at the remote site. If one is installed at a later date, you can reverse recover the data and configure replication, as described Reverse replication using the wizard (page 96).

Figure 10 Recovery process: promoting a target library over the WAN
HP StoreOnce G2 - Promoting a Target Library over the WAN using iSCSI - 2

flowchart
graph TD
    A["Start"] --> B["On the target appliance in Data Center use Mapping Configuration page to select target library on target appliance in Data Center and remove slot mapping to lost source library."]
    B --> C{Was this the only slot mapping to this target library?}
    C -->|No| D{Is it OK to remove other mappings?}
    C -->|Yes| E["The library status changes to non-replicating. Make sure its port configuration is iSCSI."]
    D -->|No| F["This recovery method is not suitable because it will break other replication mappings."]
    D -->|Yes| G["End"]
    E --> H["On host machine where recovery is to occur, install iSCSI Initiator and backup application."]
    H --> I["Configure iSCSI Initiator Name for new non-replicating library to match that of the host system."]
    I --> J["Connect to Data Center appliance and library via iSCSI from host."]
    J --> K["Import cartridges into backup application and recover data to the host over WAN."]
    K --> L["When failed D2D is replaced at remote site, use reverse replication to recover data to it."]
    L --> M["End"]

Promoting a target library using colocation

New server hardware has been purchased and installed and the admin now wants to recover data to the server. The administrator decides to move the StoreOnce Backup System appliance that was in the Data Center to the remote office (maybe only temporarily) in order to recover server data.

Figure 11 Recovery by relocating the Target Appliance
HP StoreOnce G2 - Promoting a target library using colocation - 1

flowchart
graph TD
    A["Host"] --> B["D2D2500"]
    C["Host"] --> B
    B --> D["Data Center"]
    D --> E["D2D2500"]
    E --> F["Truck"]
    style A fill:#ccc
    style C fill:#ccc
    style B fill:#fff
    style D fill:#fff
    style E fill:#ccc
    style F fill:#ccc
    classDef red_X stroke:#000,stroke-width:2px;
    classDef green_Y stroke:#000,stroke-width:2px;
    classDef green_O stroke:#000,stroke-width:2px;
    classDef red_Low stroke:#000,stroke-dasharray: 5 5;
    class D,E,F red

Before the failure a mapping existed between a Source Library on the remote site StoreOnce Backup System and a Target Library on the Data Center StoreOnce Backup System. After the failure, the mapping still exists but the Source Library is missing. The Target Library on the Data Center StoreOnce Backup System is still in target library mode, it has not had its mappings removed.

!

IMPORTANT: This configuration is possible in only limited situations because it will break any other backups or replications to the Data Center appliance. In a simple Active-Passive scenario, however, this may be a very good model.

  1. Transport the appliance from the Data Center to the remote site and reconfigure networking, etc.

  2. On the Target Appliance (now in the remote site), go to the Replication - Virtual Tape Mappings page, select the Target Library and remove the slot mapping between it and the lost Source Library.

  3. As long as there is only one slot mapping to the Target Library, it will become a Non-Replicating Library.

NOTE: If there are other mappings, do not remove them if it will break other library replication. Do not proceed, this method is not suitable.

  1. Decide which interface, iSCSI or FC, you will use to connect the library to the host and edit the port configuration of the newly promoted Non-Replicating Library to make it iSCSI or FC, as appropriate.

- For an iSCSI connection, install the iSCSI initiator on the host machine at the remote site where recovery is to occur and install the backup application. Configure the iSCSI Initiator Name for the newly promoted Non-Replicating Library to be that of the host system.

- For a FC connection, connect to the SAN. (If necessary, install a FC card in the server.)

  1. Connect to the colocated appliance and library from the host.

  2. Import the cartridges into the backup application and recover the data over the WAN.

  3. At this point there is no HP StoreOnce Source Appliance at the remote site. If one is installed at a later date, you can reverse recover the data and configure replication, as described in Reverse replication using the wizard (page 96).

Figure 12 Recovery process: promoting a target library using colocation
HP StoreOnce G2 - Promoting a target library using colocation - 2

flowchart
graph TD
    A["Start"] --> B["Transport the Data Center D2D to the remote site and reconfigure networking."]
    B --> C["On the Data Center D2D use Mapping Configuration page to select target library on the Data Center D2D and remove slot mapping between it and the source library."]
    C --> D{Was this the only slot mapping to this target library?}
    D -->|No| E{Is it OK to remove other mappings?}
    D -->|Yes| F["The library status changes to non-replicating."]
    E -->|No| G["This recovery method is not suitable because it will break other replication mappings."]
    E -->|Yes| H["End"]
    F --> I{Which interface will hosts use to connect to D2D?}
    I -->|Yes| J["iSCSI"]
    I -->|No| K["FC"]
    J --> L["Make sure the port configuration of the newly non-replicating library is iSCSI."]
    K --> M["Make sure the port configuration of the newly non-replicating library is FC."]
    L --> N["On host machine where recovery is to occur, install iSCSI initiator and backup application."]
    M --> O["Install FC card into server and connect to SAN."]
    N --> P["Configure iSCSI Initiator Name for new non-replicating library to match that of the host system."]
    O --> Q["Connect to FC library on co-located appliance."]
    P --> R["Connect to co-located appliance and library via iSCSI from host."]
    Q --> S["Import cartridges into backup application and recover data to the host over WAN."]
    R --> S
    S --> T["When failed D2D is replaced at remote site, use reverse replication to recover data to it."]
    T --> U["End"]

Recovering a Source Appliance (NAS shares)

IMPORTANT: If you replace the disks in the source StoreOnce Backup System and keep the original appliance, the source to target mapping will still exist on the repaired StoreOnce Backup System. You MUST break this mapping BEFORE carrying out recovery. If you do not, The now blank Source Share (on the replacement disks) will overwrite the data on the Target Share. You will, effectively, lose backup data on both Source and Target Shares.

Reverse replication using the wizard

In this example, the remote site has lost both the host servers and the StoreOnce system. New hardware has been purchased and installed and the administrator now wants to recover data to the StoreOnce Backup System and then restore to the host server. Before the failure a mapping existed between a Source Library on the remote site StoreOnce Backup System and a Target Librc on the Data Center StoreOnce Backup System. After the failure the Source Library is missing; the mapping may or may not still exist.

Seeding

It is possible to reverse seed the first full restore using a USB disk, as follows:

  1. Map from the host at the target site to the NAS share on the HP StoreOnce Backup System and copy the share to a USB disk attached to the host.
  2. Transport the media to the Replication Source site and attach it to a host.
  3. Map from a host at the source site to the new share on the Replication Source and copy across the data from the USB disk before running the Recovery wizard.

Figure 13 Recovery by reverse seeding NAS shares on a replacement source appliance
HP StoreOnce G2 - Seeding - 1

flowchart
graph TD
    subgraph Remote Site A
        A1["Host A"] --> D2D2500
        A2["Host B"] --> D2D2500
        D2D2500 --> D2D4000
    end
    subgraph Remote Site B
        B1["Host A"] --> D2D2500
        B2["Host B"] --> D2D2500
        D2D2500 --> D2D4000
        D2D4000 --> D2D4000
        D2D4000 --> USB Disk
    end
    subgraph Data Center
        A3["Host A"] --> D2D4000
        A4["Host B"] --> D2D4000
        D2D4000 --> USB Disk
    end
    D2D4000 -.-> D2D2500
    D2D4000 -.-> USB Disk
    D2D4000 -.-> D2D2500
    D2D4000 -.-> USB Disk
    D2D2500 -.-> D2D2500
    D2D2500 -.-> D2D4000
    D2D4000 -.-> USB Disk
    D2D4000 -.-> USB Disk
    D2D2500 -.-> USB Disk
    D2D2500 -.-> USB Disk
    D2D4000 -.-> USB Disk
    D2D4000 -.-> USB Disk
    D2D2500 -.-> USB Disk
    D2D2500 -.-> USB Disk
    D2D4000 -.-> USB Disk
    D2D4000 -.-> USB Disk
    D2D4000 -.-> USB Disk
    D2D4000 -.-> USB Disk
    D2D4000 -.-> USB Disk
    D2D4000 -.-> USB Disk
    D2D4000 -.-> USB Disk
    D2D4000 -.-> USB Disk
    style Remote Site A fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style Remote Site B fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style Data Center fill:#ccf,stroke:#333
  1. Create a new Non-Replicating Share on the Source Appliance (by using the NAS Shares page).

Shares CFS Server Shares File shares created on the D2D Backup System are intended to be used as targets for backup applications. They should not be used as general purpose storage or for drag-and-drop backups, doing so will result in lower duplication efficiency and performance. Name Role Status Access Protocol User Data Stored Size On Disk Croated Lost Modified Share1 Non Reflicting Online CFS - - 3.14 11/09/2010 3.14 11/09/2010 Share2 Non Reflicting Online CFS - - 3.17 11/09/2010 3.17 11/09/2010 Create Share Share5 Share Permissions Name Share3 Description HP D2D Share 5 Access Protocol CFS Write Protection Cancel Create

  1. Reverse seed the first full restore. The simplest way to do this is to use a USB disk, as de at the beginning of this section. It is also possible to recover across the WAN, but this m place an unacceptable load on bandwidth or time availability.
  2. Go to the Replication - NAS Mappings: page and select the new non-replicating share.
  3. Click Start Recovery Wizard.

Status Virtual Tape Mappings HAS Mappings Partner Appliances Local Appliance Event History Local Shares Name Role Status Access Protocol User Data Stored Size On Date Entries Share Version Replication Status Share1 Non-Replacing Online CFS - - - - 1 1 Mapping for Local Share Configure a new share mapping between the selected local share and a share on a target appliance. Start Replication Wizard Make the local share as a source share and recover files from the target. Start Recovery Wizard

  1. At the Select Target Appliance step, select Add Target Appliance and provide the IP address of the previous replication target device.

NAS Recovery Wizard Welcome Select Target Appliance Select Target Share Edit Share Mapping Summary Step 1 - Select Target Appliance The purpose of this step is to select the appliance which source the desired partner share. Select Target Appliance Click to show basic details box Appliance Name Appliance Address Serial Number Free Space Online Protocol Version D3D C2000001 192.165.0.111 CDC83018NY 7 TB Online Version 2 Add Target Appliance < Back Next > Cancel Help

  1. Select the existing Target. This is the Target NAS share from which files should be recovered. Click Next.

NAS Recovery Wizard ✓ Welcome ✓ Select Target Appliance ✓ Select Target Share Edit Share Mapping Summary Step 2 - Select Target Share The purpose of this site is to select the desired partner share. Select Target Appliance Share + Click to showHide details box Name Role Status Access Protocol User Data Shared Fill Share Version Share1 Replication Source Online DFS - 1 1 Share2 Replication Target Online DFS - 1 1 Share3 Non Replicating Online DFS - 1 1 < Back Next > Cancel Help

NOTE: If the mapping has been broken there will be an entry that says Non-replicating library (instead of Replication Target).

  1. At the Edit Share Mapping step, either adopt the mapping that had been configured or create a new mapping and click Next.

  2. Click Adopt to run reverse replication.

Status Virtual Tape Mappings NAS Mappings Partner Appliances Local Appliances Local History NAS Recovery Wizard Name Share1 Share2 Share3 Mapping for Local Share Welcome Select Target Appliance Select Target Share Edit Share Mapping Summary Step 3 - Edit Share Mapping The purpose of this step is to configure the share machine which will be created. Mapping for Local Share:Share3 to Share2 on D2B-CZC$3018MY Mapping Name: Share Mapping 1 Number of Files: 0 File System: OFS Size of Share: 0.9 < Back Next > Cancel Help

  1. As soon as reverse replication has completed, the data may be recovered to the host using the original backup application.

  2. New backups can now run to the Source Appliance and replication will run normally with further configuration.

Figure 14 Reverse replication process: source lost
HP StoreOnce G2 - Seeding - 7

flowchart
graph TD
    A["Start"] --> B["Create non-replicating share on new source appliance."]
    B --> C{Use USB disk for seeding?}
    C -->|Yes| D["USB disk copy: <br>1. Copy first full backup from target share to USB disk.<br>2. Transport disk to source appliance and insert into host server.<br>3. Create non-replicating share on source and copy files from USB disk."]
    D --> E["On the Mapping Configuration page select the new non-replicating share on the source appliance. <br>1. Select Start Recovery Wizard.<br>2. Add IP address or FQDN of the target appliance that was used as previous replication target.<br>3. Select share to use for recovery (may still be target or non-replicating if mapping was broken).<br>4. Adopt previously configured share mapping or create new one, if mapping broken.<br>5. Select Apply to start reverse replication."]
    E --> F["As soon as reverse replication has completed use original backup application to recover data to the host."]
    F --> G["New backups to the source device and replication can now run normally."]
    G --> H["End"]
    C -->|No| D

Promoting a Target Share over the WAN using NAS

The remote site has lost both the host servers and the StoreOnce system. New server hardware has been purchased and installed and the admin now wants to recover data to the server. The admin has not installed a new StoreOnce Backup System and is going to recover data directly the server from the Data Center StoreOnce appliance over the WAN (which will take a long

NOTE: The procedure described below retains the ability to back up to the Target Share. If this is not required, a simpler solution may be to recover data from the Target Share, which is re

Figure 15 Recovery by promoting a Target Share over NAS
HP StoreOnce G2 - Promoting a Target Share over the WAN using NAS - 1

flowchart
graph TD
    subgraph Remote Site A
        A1["Host A"] --> D2D2500
        A2["Host B"] --> D2D2500
        D2D2500 --> DataCenter
    end
    subgraph Remote Site B
        B1["Host A"] --> D2D2500
        B2["Host B"] --> D2D2500
        B3["Replacement Host A"] --> D2D2500
        B4["Replacement Host B"] --> D2D2500
        D2D2500 --> DataCenter
    end
    D2D4000 --> DataCenter
    D2D4000 -.->|dotted arrow| DataCenter

Before the failure a mapping existed between a Source Share on the remote site StoreOnce Backi System and a Target Share on the Data Center StoreOnce Backup System. After the failure the mapping still exists but the Source Share is missing. The Target Share on the Data Center StoreO Backup System is still in Target Share mode, it has not had its mappings removed.

  1. On the Target Appliance in the Data Center, go to the Replication - NAS Mappings page, select the Target Share and remove the mapping between it and the lost Source Share.
  2. The Target Share becomes a Non-Replicating Share.
  3. Make sure the backup application is targeting the newly non-replicating share and recover the data.
  4. At this point there is no HP StoreOnce Source Appliance at the remote site. If one is installed at a later date, you can reverse recover the data and configure replication, as described in (page 104).

Figure 16 Recovery process: promoting a target share over the WAN
HP StoreOnce G2 - Promoting a Target Share over the WAN using NAS - 2

flowchart
graph TD
    A["Start"] --> B["On the target appliance in Data Center use Mapping Configuration page to select target share on target appliance in Data Center and remove share mapping to lost source share."]
    B --> C["The share status changes to non-replicating."]
    C --> D["Make sure the backup application is targeting the non-replicating share."]
    D --> E["End"]

Promoting a Target Share using colocation

New server hardware has been purchased and installed and the admin now wants to recover data to the server. The administrator decides to move the StoreOnce appliance that was in the Data Center to the remote office (maybe only temporarily) in order to recover the server data.

Figure 17 Recovery by relocating the Target Appliance
HP StoreOnce G2 - Promoting a Target Share using colocation - 1

flowchart
graph TD
    A["Remote Site"] --> B["Host"]
    A --> C["Host"]
    B --> D["D2D2500"]
    C --> D
    D --> E["Data Center"]
    E --> F["D2D2500"]
    F --> G["①"]
    F --> H["②"]
    G --> I["Truck"]
    H --> I
    style D stroke:#ff0000,stroke-width:2px
    style E stroke:#0000ff,stroke-width:2px

Before the failure a mapping existed between a Source Share on the remote site StoreOnce B System and a Target Share on the Data Center StoreOnce Backup System. After the failure the mapping still exists but the Source Share is missing. The Target Share on the Data Center Sto Backup System is still in target share mode, it has not had its mappings removed.

!

IMPORTANT: This configuration is possible in only limited situations because it will break any other backups or replications to the Data Center appliance. In a simple Active-Passive scenario, however, this may be a very good model.

  1. Transport the appliance from the Data Center to the remote site and reconfigure networking etc.
  2. On the Target Appliance (now in the remote site), go to the Replication - NAS Mappings page, select the Target Share and remove the slot mapping between it and the lost Source Shar
  3. The Target Share becomes a Non-Replicating Share.

NOTE: If there are other share mappings, do not proceed, this method is not suitable.

  1. Check that the newly non-replicating NAS share has been configured correctly to allow the required hosts to access it.
  2. Recover data from the NAS share to the host over WAN.
  3. At this point there is no HP StoreOnce Source Appliance at the remote site. If one is installed at a later date, you can reverse recover the data and configure replication, as described (page 104).

Figure 18 Recovery process: promoting a target share using colocation
HP StoreOnce G2 - Promoting a Target Share using colocation - 2

flowchart
graph TD
    A["Start"] --> B["Transport the Data Center D2D to the remote site and reconfigure networking."]
    B --> C["On the Data Center D2D use Mapping Configuration page to select target share on the Data Center D2D and remove share mapping between it and the source share."]
    C --> D["The share status changes to non-replicating."]
    D --> E["Check that the newly non-replicating NAS share has been configured correctly to allow required hosts to access it."]
    E --> F["Copy data from the share to the host over WAN."]
    F --> G["When failed D2D is replaced at remote site, use reverse replication to recover data to it."]
    G --> H["End"]

10 Restore processes without replication

In this chapter:

  • Restore scenarios
  • Restoring single files
  • Restore and deduplication
  • Reconnecting toto iSCSI VTL devices after host failure

NOTE: If you are using replication, there are other options for restoring data.

Restore scenarios

There are three main restore scenarios.

Basic file restore

This is carried out from the HP StoreOnce Backup System. Use the backup application to restore files from the HP StoreOnce Backup System to the host, as required.

Restore after host failure

This is carried out from the HP StoreOnce Backup System.

  1. Rebuild the host operating systems and install applications then reconnect to the HP StoreOnce Backup System.
  2. Use the backup application to restore data files from the HP StoreOnce Backup System to the host.

Bare Metal Disaster Recovery (NAS Shares)

NOTE: Bare Metal Disaster Recovery may be possible in some cases with Fibre Channel VTL, the backup application supports Fibre Channel connectivity through the recovery process. iSCSI VTL recovery in this way is not possible with current backup applications.

If your backup application supports Bare Metal Disaster Recovery, you can use it create a box recovery CD.

  1. Use the boot recovery CD to boot the host system into your backup application's recovery console and reconnect to the HP StoreOnce Backup System.
  2. When the backup application prompts for access to the NAS share, provide the IP address of the StoreOnce Backup System.

Restoring single files

This is very easy and fast. Run your backup software and select the files to be restored. Even restoring from virtual tape devices, where the software application is tape-based, the restore performance on your HP StoreOnce Backup System is much faster than restoring from physical tape.

Restore and deduplication

With data deduplication the actual restore time from disk is longer because the data chunks m be reconstructed. However, because more data can be stored on the disk, restore is still fast b there is no need to retrieve data from archived physical media.

Reconnecting to the to iSCSI VTL devices after host failure

Each configured library or tape drive on the HP StoreOnce Backup System is uniquely mapped to a host. It cannot be seen by any other host on the network. If the host system fails, you must re it and reconfigure the mapping of the host to the configured backup device on the HP StoreOnce Backup System.

  1. Install the operating system on the host. If possible, give the host the same Computer Name as the host that failed.
  2. Install the backup application on the host.
  3. Run the iSCSI Initiator on the restored host. (See also the HP StoreOnce Backup System Installation and Configuration Guide.)
  4. Make a note of the Initiator Node Name (this can be found on the General tab on the Microsoft iSCSI initiator).

iSCSI Initiator Properties General | Discovery | Targets | Persistent Targets | Bound Volumes/Devices | The iSCSI protocol uses the following information to uniquely identify this initiator and authenticate targets. Initiator Node Name: iqn.1991-05.com.microsoft.myserver.mydomain.local To rename the initiator node, click Change. To authenticate targets using CHAP, click Secret to specify a CHAP secret. To configure IPSec Tunnel Mode addresses, click Tunnel. Change... Secret Tunnel OK Cancel Apply

  1. Modify the target library to see the new machine name of the restored host. Select the Device page on the Web Management Interface, and put the target library into Edit mode. Copy the host's Initiator Node Name (found on the General tab in step 4) into iSCSI Initiator Name.

Library 1 Device Details Library Name Library 1 Simulation Type Std Q2 Autoencoder Drive simulation LTO 3 Total No Of Cartridge Sets 8 Number of Drives 1 Decuplication ✓ Creation Time 17.04.2500/16:09 Part Std Part No of Barcode Characters Six Right Barcode Justification Left Right Cancel Update

NOTE: If you have used the Secret option on the iSCSI Initiator to enter an authentication string, you must enter the same information on the Web Management Interface. See iSCSI (Status) (page 55).

  1. On the Discovery tab, enter the IP address of the HP StoreOnce Backup System to add it as a target portal for the host. Do not change the Port; it should be 3260.

iSCSI Initiator Properties General Discovery Targets Persistent Targets Bound Volumes/Devices Target Portals Address Port Adapter IP Address 192.168.0.11 3260 Default Default Add Remove Refresh iSNS Servers Name Add Remove Refresh OK Cancel Apply

  1. Target devices have already been configured on the HP StoreOnce Backup System for the host that failed, so they will appear in the list on the Targets tab with a status of Inactive, if you are using the same hostname and iSCSI initiator node name as the host that failed. Otherwise new devices will be configured for this host. You must log on to the appropriate targets for your host. Remember that each library has two devices and you must log onto one separately. We recommend that you also select the automatic restore on boot option the Log On... dialog.

iSCSI Initiator Properties General | Discovery | Targets | Persistent Targets | Bound Volumes/Devices Select a target and click Log On to access the storage devices for that target. Click details to see information about the sessions, connections and devices for that target. Targets: Name Status iqn.1986-03.com.hp:storage.d2dbs.hu164603r... Connected iqn.1986-03.com.hp:storage.d2dbs.hu164603r... Connected Details Log On... Refresh OK Cancel Apply

  1. Run your backup application. It should see the library device on the HP StoreOnce Backup System. Import the media into your backup application's database and restore the latest full backup from the HP StoreOnce Backup System.

11 Understanding LEDs

In this chapter:

•HP D2D4324/4312 Backup System
•HP D2D4112/4106 Backup System
•HP D2D2502/2504 Backup System

HP D2D4324/4312 Backup System

Front LEDs

Figure 19 Front LEDs on the HP D2D4324/4312 Backup System
Diagram of a server rack with labeled components including power, switches, and ports, showing a zoomed-in view from the top panel.

  1. Power On button/LED

  2. System Health LED

  3. HP D2D Beacon LED

  4. System Insight Display

Steady green: Power connected, device ready to use

Steady amber: Device switched off or in hibernation with power connected

Off: No power connected

Steady green: Hardware is performing correctly

Flashing amber: degraded condition

Flashing red: critical condition, such as power supply or fan failure

Steady blue: identifies the unit

Amber: Power off or system hardware fault

The HP Systems Insight Display LEDs represent the system board layout and may be useful for troubleshooting. See the "Maintenance and Service Guide" for more details.

Rear LEDs

Figure 20 HP D2D4324/4312 rear panel LAN LEDs
Technical diagram of a server rack with labeled ports and connectors, showing internal structure and component layout.

  1. LAN network speed LED indicator

Steady green: The LAN connection is using 10 Mbps/100 Mbps link.

Steady amber: The LAN connection is using a GbE link. Off: No connection.

Flashing green: Ongoing network data activity.2. LAN activity stat Off: No network data activity or no connection.

HP D2D4112/4106 Backup System

Front LEDs on the HP D2D4106/4112

Figure 21 Front LEDs on the HP D2D4112 and 4106 Backup System
Diagram of a server rack with labeled components and an inset showing network connections between five numbered slots.

  1. HP D2D Beacon LED
    Steady blue: identifies the unit

  2. System Health LED

  3. and 4. LAN port LEDS

  4. Power On button/LED

Amber: Power off or system hardware fault

Steady green: Hardware is performing correctly

Flashing amber: degraded condition

Flashing red: critical condition, such as power supply or fan failure

Flashing green: network connection

Off: no network connection or network not configured

Steady green: Power connected, device ready to use

Steady amber: Device switched off or in hibernation with power connected

Off: No power connected

Rear LEDs on the HP D2D4106/4112

Figure 22 HP D2D4112/4106 LAN LEDs
Diagram of a computer rack with labeled components and an inset showing two numbered parts (1) with hexagonal patterns and ports.

  1. LAN network speed LED indicator

Steady green: The LAN connection is using 10 Mbps/100 Mbps link.

Steady amber: The LAN connection is using a GbE link. Off: No connection.

  1. LAN activity status LED indicator

Flashing green: Ongoing network data activity.

Off: No network data activity or no connection.

HP D2D2502/2504 Backup System

Front view of the HP D2D2502/2504

Figure 23 Front view of the HP D2D2502/2504 Backup System
UID 1 2 3 4 5

Steady blue: identifies the unit1. HP D2D Beacon LED

Steady green: Hardware is performing correctly2. System Hea

Flashing amber: degraded condition

Flashing red: critical condition, such as power supply or fan failure

Flashing green: network connection3. and 4. LAN port LEDS

Off: no network connection or network not configured

Steady green: Power connected, device ready to use5. Power On

Steady amber: Device switched off or in hibernation with power connected

Off: No power connected

Rear view of the HP D2D2502/2504 G2

Figure 24 HP D2D2502/2504 rear panel LEDs
Diagram of a server rack with labeled components and hexagonal circuit patterns, highlighting two numbered parts.

  1. LAN network speed LED indicator

Steady green: The LAN connection is using 10 Mbps/100 Mbps link.

Steady amber: The LAN connection is using a GbE link.

Off: No connection.

Flashing green: Ongoing network data activity.2. LAN activity stat

Off: No network data activity or no connection.

Hot-plug drive LEDs

The status of hot-plug hard drives installed in the server is indicated by the drive activity LED indicated on the front panel of the server.

Figure 25 Drive LEDs
HP StoreOnce G2 - Hot-plug drive LEDs - 1

natural_image Pure electrical circuit lines without any symbols

Steady green: Online, no activity1. Disk Online LED

Flashing green: Ongoing disk activity

Steady amber: Disk has failed

Flashing amber: Predictive disk failure

Off: The disk is not a part of RAID

Steady blue: identifies a specific disk within the unit2. Disk beacc

Beacon mode

The HP StoreOnce Backup System supports a Beacon LED sequence, which helps a user identify which unit is being configured, if several are connected to the network. AL HP D2D4000 Serial Backup System also have a Beacon LED on the individual disks so that you can identify a sp disk within the HP D2D.

Use the Network page of the Web Management Interface to turn Beacon Mode on and off for HP StoreOnce Backup System. This turns the Beacon LED on the front and the rear of the HP solid blue. If you do not switch off Beacon Mode, it will continue for 5 minutes. See also Network

(Configuration) (page 33). You can also switch Beacon mode on and off by pressing the LED the front panel.

Fibre Channel card LEDs

If you have the Fibre Channel version of the HP D2D, there are three LEDs adjacent to each port.

Table 26 FC card LEDs

ActivityAmber LEDGreen LEDYellow LED
Power Off (OK)OffOffOff
OnOnOnPower on before or after software initialization.Awaiting HBA software initialization.
FlashingFlashingFlashingPower on after software initialization. Link not initialized.
Alternately flashingAlternately flashingAlternately flashingsoftware fault (OK)
OnOffOffConnected at 2 (HP D2D4300 Series only) or 1 (all other FC systems) Gb/s
OffOffFlashingActivity at 2 (HP D2D4300 Series only) or 1 (all other FC systems) Gb/s (OK)
OffOnOffConnected at 4 (HP D2D4300 Series only) or 2 (all other FC systems Gb/s
OffOffFlashingActivity at 4 (HP D2D4300 Series only) or 2 (all other FC systems)Gb/s (OK)
OffOffOnConnected at 8 (HP D2D4300 Series only) or 4 (all other FC systems) Gb/s
OffOffFlashingActivity at 8 (HP D2D4300 Series only) or 4 (all other FC systems) Gb/s (OK)

Capacity upgrade kit LEDs

There are three LEDs on the front of the Capacity Upgrade Kit.

Figure 26 Capacity Upgrade LEDs
Diagram of a server rack with labeled components and connection points

Green: System activity1. Heartbeat LED

Off: No system activity

Amber: Fault condition2. Fault LED

Off: No fault condition

Blue: Identified3. UID button/LED

Flashing blue: Active remote management

Off: No remote management

12 Hardware monitoring

This feature enables the HP StoreOnce Backup System to report any changes in the status or condition of its power supply, fan or thermal sensors. This feature is only available on G2 sys

NOTE: This feature is only available on G2 systems.

Changes may be notified in a number of ways:

  • Any failures of fans or power supply or any overheating events are reported via email alerts and SNMP, if configured correctly.
  • The HP StoreOnce Backup System reflects its overall status on the Summary and Event Log pages.
  • Any change to hardware status or condition generates an entry in the Event Log Messages page (see also Log (Status) (page 57)). Each entry displays a severity icon to reflect Information, Warning or Critical.

i Indicates standard information.

Indicates a warning state. Something needs attention but it is not critical to the successful operation of the device. For example, a disk may have failed or disks may be installed in an expansion shelf but not licensed.

Indicates a critical state. Something needs attention. Investigate immediately.

NOTE: Email alerts and SNMP traps will only be generated, if the HP StoreOnce Backup System has been configured correctly to support emails and traps being sent to the HP SIM Server. R to SNMP (Configuration) (page 37) and Email Alerts (Configuration) (page 43).

An example email alert

The following example shows an email alert that has been sent from an HP StoreOnce Backup System.

This is a system generated message from your

HP StoreOnce D2D Backup System

Email Notification From HP-CR206F1F2E

04-Feb-2012 11:41:55 +0000 : An optional fan is not operating normally.

04-Feb-2012 11:41:55 +0000 : The Fans are now redundant on Chassis 1

04-Feb-2012 11:42:25 +0000 : System fan has returned to normal operation.

For further information please browse to

https://HP-CR206F1F2E.com (https://XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX)

Please do not reply to this email.

******************************************************************************************

An example Event log page

Activity Storage Storage Reporting Network iSCSI Fibre Channel Log Log Messages • Show Search Box Time Severity Message 2012/02/04 11:42 6 Notification Email sent to darren.semple-smith@hp.com 2012/02/04 11:42 6 System fan has returned to normal operation. 2012/02/04 11:41 ✗ The Fans are now redundant on Chassa 1 2012/02/04 11:41 ✗ An optional fan is not operating normally. 2012/02/04 11:41 6 Notification Email sent to darren.semple-smith@hp.com 2012/02/04 11:41 ✗ The Fans are no longer redundant on Chassa 1. 2012/02/04 11:41 ✗ The Fan Degraded on Chassa 1; Fan 1 2012/02/03 9:25 6 Notification Email sent to darren.semple-smith@hp.com 2012/02/03 9:24 6 System Status: Good

An example SNMP trap

The following screenshot illustrates an example of a trap captured in the HP SIM Server, when SNMP is configured.

(HP StorageWorks D2D) Record to All Conditions System Tools & Links Options Transactions Start Launch Cleared http://http/kgCriticalHealthTrap 300/412.19:02 Power Supply Trap Cleared http://www.d2d.com/healthtrap 300/412.19:01 Power Supply Trap Cleared http://http/kgCriticalHealthTrap 300/412.19:01 Power Supply Trap Event Details: (SNMP) hpHttpMgCriticalHealthTrap Event Identification and Details Final Security Informational Closed Status Cleared Cleared Event Source Associated Systems Associated Systems Status Critical Power Supply Max, 0801-0812, 15:38:467 Description The device's health has changed to critical Used Category Contamination ContextNow Events Management Power Supply Trap Trap Details Exercise Description Value The unique device identification within the instance of this link: System Object ID for the Device entity This should be an AOCI integer format. (e.g. 1.2.6.1.4.1.1.2.2.6.1.1). The value may not be null. This represents a globally unique ID for the device. This MUST be on the ordered combination of the manufacturer, product name, AND any other kind that is necessary to guarantee global requirements. This value may not be null e.g. HPYCZ0A04E02650 This object contains the URL for the device's management software. If it does not exist the value in empty string, it will be not supported, then return invalid. This value is retained across levels: The identified a management application should use for the 'specimen' to the entity's URL. Device specific event error code The Power Supply is Failed or Cancel at, (i.e., (i.e., (i.e., (i.e., (i.e., (i.e., (i.e., (i.e., (i.e., (i.e., (i.e., (i.e., (i.e., (i.e., (i.e., (i.e., (i.e., (i.e., (i.e., (i.e., (i.e., (i.e., (i.e., (i.e., (i.e., (i.e.), (i.e., (i.e., (i.e., (i.e., (i.e., (i.e., (i.e., (i.e., (i.e., (i.e., (i.e., (i.e., (i.e., (i.e., (i.e., (i.e., (i.e., (i.e., (i.e., (i.e., (i.e., (i.e., (i.e., (i.e., (i.e.)#) Wb information The associated URL File Name for this trip is hereby need and the link identifier 0804-467 View Previous Details Close Details

Resolving problems

The tables in the following sections explain what events are reported and how to interpret the location and ID values in event messages. Please refer to the HP StoreOnce Backup System Maintenance and Service Guide for information about replacing parts.

What events are reported for head units?

NOTE: Power supply failures are only reported if the HP StoreOnce Backup System has redundant power supplies. This is not relevant for HP D2D2500 Series Backup Systems.

Table 27 Power Supply and Fan events for HP D2D2500 Series, HP D2D4100 Series D2D4300 Series Backup Systems

Event LogAlertEmail AlertSNMP SentenceProblemComj
(see also note above)FailedPOWER SUPPLY power cable is disconnectedYesYesYesCautionS
YesYesYesCautionS
InsertedSystem Power SupplyinsertedInformationYesYesYes
Not RedundantSystem Power Supplies not redundantCautionYesYesYes
Repaired(Message as above)...repairedYesYesYesInformati
YesYesYesCautionF
RemovedYesYesYesCautionS
InsertedSystem Fan insertedYesYesYesInformati
YesYesRedCautionS
Repaired(Message as above)...repairedYesYesYesInformati

Table 28 Temperature Sensor events for HP D2D2500 Series, HP D2D4100 Series and Series Backup Systems

Event LogAtEmail SharedMSNMP SentenceProblem
TEMPERATURE SENSORApproaching Dangerous TemperatureTemperature, theis reporting overheating conditionsApproaching DangerousYesYesYesCritical
System OverheatingYesYesYesCautionS
Repaired(Message as above) ...repairs YesInformati

Location and ID values

Table 29 Location and Thermal Sensor ID values for HP D2D2500 Series and HP D Backup Systems

LocationLocationIDLocationIDID
Ambient1Memory_BD11I/O_Zone21
CPU#12Memory_BD12I/O_Zone22
CPU#23Memory_BD13I/O_Zone23
Memory_BD4System_BD14I/O_Zone24
Memory_BD5System_BD15SCSI_BACKPLANE_ZONE25
System_BD6System_BD16SCSI_BACKPLANE_ZONE26
System_BD7System_BD17SCSI_BACKPLANE_ZONE27
Memory_BD8System_BD18SCSI_BACKPLANE_ZONE28

Table 29 Location and Thermal Sensor ID values for HP D2D2500 Series and HP D2D4 Backup Systems (continued)

IDLocationIDLocationIDL
29SCSI_BACKPLANE_Z
30SCSI_BACKPLANE_Z

Table 30 Location and Thermal Sensor ID values for HP D2D4300 Series Backup System

IDLocationIDLocationIDL
1Ambient/O_Zone21Processor_Zone11
2CPU#121/O2ZBve.Supply_Zone
3CPU#231/O2Zb/o_Zone
4Mem04/BDZb/o_Zone
5Mem05/BDZsystem_board
6SystemB/D_Zone
7SystemB/D_Zone
8Mem08/BD_Zone
9Mem09/BD_Zone
10I/O2D/DEZone

What events are reported for expansion shelves?

Table 31 Power Supply and Fan events for all expansion shelves (HP D2D2500 Series, HP D2D4100 Series and HP D2D4300 Series Backup Systems)

ComponentProblemMessageAlert levelEvent LogEmail AlertsSNMP Trap
Failed POWER SUPExternal StoragePower Supplyhas failed or power cable is disconnectedCautionYesYesYes
RemovedExternal StoragePower SupplyremovedCautionYesYesYes
InsertedExternal StoragePower SupplyinsertedInformationYesYesYes
Not RedundantExternal StoragePower Supplies not redundantCautionYesYesYes
Repaired(Message as above)...repairedInformationYesYesYes
FANFailedFan FailureCautionYesYesYes
RemovedSystem Fan RemovedCautionYesYesYes
InsertedSystem Fan insertedInformationYesYesYes
Not RedundantSystem Fans not redundantCautionYesYesYes
Repaired(Message as above)...repairedInformationYesYesYes

13 Troubleshooting

Use the information in this chapter to troubleshoot problems. More detailed troubleshooting information can be found at http://www.hp.com/support.

This chapter provides troubleshooting information on:

  • Connecting to the StoreOnce Backup System from the backup application
    •Connecting to the network
    • Using the 10-Gb ports
    •Performance
    •Web Management Interface errors and warnings
    •Power On/Off problems
  • Cannot connect to Web Management Interface
    •NFS State handle error
  • Cannot authenticate an iSCSI session
    •Diagnostic Fibre Channel device (page 130)
    • If the HP D2D runs out of space
  • Cannot access a storage shelf
  • Backup or replication fails
    •Recovering devices that have failed to start or have become read-only
  • StoreOnce Backup System configuration problems
  • Upgrade licenses
    •Replacement of hardware
    •Upgrades to component parts

Connecting to the StoreOnce Backup System from the backup application

Make sure you have the latest version or software patches for the backup application. Please http://www.hp.com/go/connect or http://www.hp.com/go/ebs for supported applications.

Stop and restart the backup application services after the backup device has been discovered. you still cannot access the device, check Device Manager to make sure it is accessible from the host.

- Make sure that the iSCSI initiator is connected to the devices and log on to them, if they are not, configure them on the Targets tab of the iSCSI Initiator.

- If it is not accessible, rerun Discovery.

NOTE: There are practical limitations on the number of devices that each host and FC switch or HBA can access. It is possible to configure more drive and library devices than a host can at The limit for Windows or Linux hosts using the iSCSI interface is 64. Using the Fibre Channel connection there is a theoretical limit of 255 devices per FC port on a host or switch, but the limit is usually lower due to switch or host port imposed limits. It is recommended that no more than 64 devices are configured for use by a single host.

Connecting to the network

NOTE: If you have selected the Link aggregation mode, ensure that switch is configured correctly.

If you cannot access your device on the network, please check the following:

  1. Regardless of the network configuration mode and interface type, please ensure that there is a CAT-5E (or above) Ethernet cable connected to network port 1 (or 3 for HP D2D4300 Serial Backup Systems). This is the primary port for communication to the Web Management Interface and on iSCSI models, the primary port for data communications (apart from HP D2D4300 Series products, which normally use the 10Gb ports for data communications).

  2. Check that the LEDs are flashing on the LAN port and the LAN front panel LED.

- If no LEDs are flashing, you do not have a network connection – check your Ethernet cable or consult your network administrator.

- If LEDs are flashing, check that you have the correct IP address for your HP D2D. Are you using DHCP or Static IP addressing for your HP D2D? If you are unsure of your settings, please use the System Console to confirm the settings that have been configured on your HP D2D (see the HP StoreOnce Backup System Installation and Configuration Guide).

  1. Is your network running IPv4 or IPv6 mode?

- Your HP D2D will operate and automatically detect both modes of operation.

- Ensure that you have selected the correct IP Address for the network you are using.

- At this time, the HP D2D does not support DHCPv6, but you can use Static addressing in IPv6 mode.

  1. Try to PING / PINGv6 the IP address of the HP StoreOnce Backup System. If PING is successful, there is network communication between the host and the HP D2D.

  2. If you still cannot access the HP StoreOnce Backup System, use the standalone Discovery tool. Discovery is run as part of the Installation wizard; it is also installed as a standalone utility of your desktop. Run the Discovery tool and check that the HP StoreOnce Backup System appears in the list of devices for selection.

- Use the Beacon option to identify a particular HP StoreOnce Backup System on the network.

- If Discovery cannot find the device, check whether there is a Firewall. You may need to temporarily disable it. It can be re-enabled as soon as the device is configured. Or, the HP StoreOnce Backup System may be on a different subnet.

Using the 10Gb ports (HP D2D4300 Series only)

Although a warning will be displayed, it is possible to disable network ports. You can recover this only from the console screen by directly attaching a monitor and keyboard to the HP StoreOnce Backup System.

- If you cannot use the Web Management Interface, check that the 1Gb ports are enabled on the Network (Configuration) page.

- If data transfer seems slow, check that the 10Gb ports are enabled on the Network (Configuration) page. Also, make sure that the hosts are configured correctly to select the 10Gb network for data transfer. The LEDs on the 10Gb card (at the rear of the HP StoreOn Backup System) also help identify network activity. Or use iLO2 to monitor the network ports.

Performance

Your HP StoreOnce Backup System is designed for high performance backup and restore operation according to the specification documented. However, it requires careful configuration. Please refer to the D2D Best Practices for VTL, NAS and Replication implementations document on the HP Manuals page for detailed guidance.

There are many reasons why you may not see the performance you expected from your HP C

  • Your own network speed or disk access is not fast enough to allow streaming of data.
  • Your backup application is not optimized.
  • Your HP D2D is not optimized for your network and application.

Network

For iSCSI devices the HP D2D is designed to be run on a 1Gb or 10Gb (HP D2D4300 Seri network. Performance will be reduced if a 10/100BaseT network is used. The LEDs on the fro panel (1–Gb ports only) and on the network ports and also warnings on the Web Manageme Interface will indicate the network speeds at which the device is operating.

Web Management Interface errors and warnings

The Web Management Interface will highlight errors and warnings associated with the operation of the HP D2D.

  • You can configure email alerts, which will automatically send a message to your mail system when a problem occurs (see Email Alerts (Configuration) (page 43)).
  • The Summary page of the Web Management Interface can indicate an error or warning message, highlighted by an information, a warning or an error icon against major sub sys See (page 9).
  • The System Event Log in the Web Management Interface can also highlight warnings or errors. See Log (Status) (page 57).

#

TIP: If you have selected a language other than English and find that some of the messages are in English, you have upgraded the software without upgrading the language pack. This is easier remedied by following the instructions in (page 90). Best practice, however, is to always upgrade the language pack at the same time as the software.

Disk RAID errors and warnings

See Hard disk replacement (page 136) for details of hard disk drive failure and rebuild.

Network warnings

See Connecting to the network (page 125).

NTP server fails

If the NTP server (for automatic date and time update) fails to connect to the server for any item, it will fail and stop the NTP server. If this happens an email alert will be sent and the user is manually restart NTP from the Web Management Interface.

System state

This describes the overall state of the HP D2D.

RAM Failure Warning

Your HP D2D is designed to operate with a certain amount of RAM. If it is outside this limit, warning will appear. The device will still operate, but with very limited performance.

  • Check that the memory modules are correctly mounted in the slots
  • Check that you have the correct memory capacity inserted
  • Check that they are in the correct slots

CPU Faulty Warning

You HP D2D is designed to operate with a certain processor and speed. If it is outside this limit, a warning will appear. The device will still operate, but with very limited performance.

Check that the processor is the correct version

Storage Pool messages

If you have installed the Capacity Upgrade Kit (not supported on the HP D2D2500 Series) and it is powered off for any reason, you should also power down the HP StoreOnce Backup System. Then restart the Capacity Upgrade Kit before you restart the HP StoreOnce Backup System. If the two units are not powered on in the correct sequence, you will get a message that "a storage p is not available."

Power On/Off Problems

The normal boot sequence takes approximately 2 (or 5 for HP D2D4300 Series) minutes. On power up the HP StoreOnce Backup System runs its fans at high speed for approximately 10 seconds before returning to normal speed. When powering off the HP StoreOnce Backup System make sure no backup or restore jobs are running or scheduled to run while the HP StoreOnce Backup System is out of action.

HP D2D shuts down automatically

The HP D2D has found a problem with the internal hardware which requires the device to shut to avoid further hardware problems. The System Health LED on the front panel will probably be flashing RED.

- Plug in a monitor and keyboard directly to the back of the HP D2D (see the HP StoreOnce Backup System Installation and Configuration Guide) and watch for errors on boot up or the Console screen.

- If iLO-2 is available on your system, check for errors in the event and IML logs.

HP D2D does not boot up correctly

Check the Power LED on the front panel.

If the Power LED is OFF:

- Check power is connected to the HP D2D and is on.

•The PSU may be faulty.

If the Power LED is AMBER:

•Power on the HP D2D using the Power button.

- If it shuts down again, see (page 128).

If the Power LED is GREEN:

- Plug in a monitor and keyboard directly to the back of the HP D2D (see the HP StoreOnce Backup System Installation and Configuration Guide) and watch for errors on boot up or the System Console screen.

- If all the LEDs turn on except for the hard disk drive LEDs, the SmartArray RAID controller in one of the PCIe slots may be at fault. On the System Console screen, the Smart Array status

normally shown at boot time will not display. No hard disk drive LEDs will turn on. Pleas refer to SmartArray RAID information on http://www.hp.com/support.

- If the System Console screen is not seen:

The HP D2D operating system may not be seen or recognized. Check the flash memo module inside the HP D2D for correct seating. (To locate the flash memory module, re to the schematic on the hood label.)
- Check for hardware errors as the HP D2D device boots up.

HP D2D System Health LED is flashing RED (HP D2D4100 and D2D4300 Series)

One of the two power supplies is faulty or not connected to power at power on time, causing warning condition. Check the LED on the PSU to ensure it is not faulty (it should be green). E both power supplies are connected and reboot to clear this LED. The HP D2D will work satisfied with one power supply, but without any redundancy. It is recommended to power on the second power supply or replace the power supply as soon as possible.

HP D2D boots up correctly, but cannot be seen on the network

See Connecting to the network (page 125).

Cannot connect to Web Management Interface

HP D2D is not visible on the network

See Connecting to the network (page 125).

Cannot log in to the Web Management Interface

The password is case-sensitive, please make sure you know whether CAPS LOCK is on or off. If you cannot find the password to the Web Management Interface login screen, it can be res factory value.

  1. Ensure that there are no backup or restore jobs in progress to the device.
  2. Press the Power On button on the front of the HP StoreOnce Backup System three times in quick succession to reset it.
  3. After approximately 5 seconds, the HP StoreOnce Backup System will begin its reboot sequence.
  4. The HP StoreOnce Backup System will be reset to factory networking settings and the Administrator password will be reset to Admin. No user data will be lost but you will need re-configure your network settings, because they may be reset by this action.

NFS State handle error

NOTE: NetBIOS name resolution is not supported on CIFS shares.

The following sequence will cause problems when connecting to a NAS share.

  1. Create an NFS share and mount it on a Linux box.
  2. Delete the share on the D2D without unmounting it from the Linux box.
  3. Recreate the share again with the same name.

In this scenario, the Linux client will assign a new set of inodes to the new share, but when to access the old mount point it will use the previous set of inodes and will therefore not mail to connect.

Reboot the host Linux system and the connection will work again.

Cannot authenticate an iSCSI session

CHAP authentication is used within HP D2D. For details of the settings on the Microsoft iSCSI initiator and the HP D2D Web Management Interface, see also the HP StoreOnce Backup System Installation and Configuration Guide.

Diagnostic Fibre Channel device

For each FC port there will be a Diagnostic Fibre Channel Device presented to the Fabric. There will be one per active FC physical port; this means there are wo ports for an HP D2D4112, 43 or 4324 appliance.

The Diagnostic Fibre Channel device can be identified by the following example text:

Symbolic Port Name "HP D2D S/N-CZJ1440JBS HP D2DBS Diagnostic Fibre Channel S/N-MY5040204H Port-1"

Symbolic Node Name "HP D2D S/N-CZJ1440JBS HP D2DBS Diagnostic Fibre Channel S/N-MY5040204H"

A virtual driver or loader would be identified by the following example text:

Symbolic Port Name "HP D2D S/N-CZJ1440JBS HP Ultrium 4-SCSI Fibre Channel S/N-CZJ1440JC5 Port-0"

Symbolic Node Name "HP D2D S/N-CZJ1440JBS HP Ultrium 4-SCSI Fibre Channel S/N-CZJ1440JC5"

In the above the S/N-CZJ1440JBS for all devices should be identical. If this is Node Port 1, the Node Name string will be as above but, if Port 2, the Node Name string will end with "Port-2". Often the diagnostic device will be listed above the other virtual devices as it logs in first, ahead of the virtual devices. The S/N-MY5040204H string is an indication of the QLC HBA's SN not any SN of an appliance/node.

At this time these devices are part of the StoreOnce VTL implementation and are not an error or fault condition. It is recommended that these devices be removed from the switch zone that is also used for virtual drives and loaders.

If the HP StoreOnce Backup System runs out of disk space

A warning message is generated when the HP StoreOnce Backup System reaches 80% capacity. Further warnings are generated at 85% and 90% capacity, and then at 1% intervals from 91% to 99%. If capacity reaches 100%, further error messages are generated.

Log Messages
+ Show Search Box
TimeSeverityMessage
2012/11/05 17:28Stop all jobs on appliance. Remove HK blackout window in order to delete data and recover space, or consider a capacity upgrade if supported by your appliance
2012/11/05 17:28Appliance now at full capacity. Any jobs in progress will fail
2012/11/05 17:24Disk full
2012/11/05 17:24tAppliance capacity greater than 99 %
2012/11/05 17:20tAppliance capacity greater than 98 %
2012/11/05 17:16tAppliance capacity greater than 97 %
2012/11/05 17:11tAppliance capacity greater than 96 %
2012/11/05 17:06tAppliance capacity greater than 95 %
2012/11/05 17:04tAppliance capacity greater than 94 %
2012/11/05 17:01tAppliance capacity greater than 93 %
2012/11/05 16:58tAppliance capacity greater than 92 %
2012/11/05 16:56tAppliance capacity greater than 91 %
2012/11/05 16:52tDisk greater than 90% full
2012/11/05 16:52tAppliance nearing full capacity

Note that if email and SNMP alerting is configured on the device, the above warnings and error will be delivered by these methods, too.

To reduce the risk of system unavailability, HP recommends that you monitor your disk storage capacity to ensure that storage utilization stays below 80%. Keeping available disk storage capacity above 20% offers the best backup and deduplication performance. Prior to reaching 80% utilization

consider adding additional disk storage and review best practices and implementation guides to ensure the solution remains optimized.

If you have the 12-disk base unit, you can purchase and install the Capacity Upgrade Kit to your capacity (note that the HP D2D2500 Series does not support connection of a Capacity Upgrade Kit).

Further options for creating space include:

  1. Stop all backups and replication until disk space is reclaimed.
  2. Remove any housekeeping blackout window so housekeeping can process new tasks create by space to be reclamation tasks.

Configure Blackout Windows Housekeeping blackout windows allow you to automatically pause Housekeeping at certain times. The windows are appliance-wide and will pause Housekeeping for the whole appliance. System Time Monday 13:03 Blackout Window Active No Day Apply First Time Restriction Start Of Restriction End Of Restriction Apply Second Time Restriction Start Of Restriction End Of Restriction Sunday □ 00:00 00:00 □ 00:00 00:00 Monday □ 00:00 00:00 □ 00:00 00:00 Tuesday □ 00:00 00:00 □ 00:00 00:00 Wednesday □ 00:00 00:00 □ 00:00 00:00 Thursday □ 00:00 00:00 □ 00:00 00:00 Friday □ 00:00 00:00 □ 00:00 00:00 Saturday □ 00:00 00:00 □ 00:00 00:00 Pause Housekeeping Edit

  1. Delete unused virtual tape libraries (VTLs) or NAS shares where data has expired.

NOTE: HP does not recommend the deletion of large numbers of individual cartridges to regain space because this can create a large amount of Housekeeping work on the StoreBackup System which will have a significant negative impact on its performance. It is preferred to delete entire virtual tape libraries, where possible, or to limit the number of cartridges I deleted to less than five per day. For the same reason, it is preferable to delete entire N shares rather than large amounts of data from a share.

  1. Delete synchronized replication targets, if they exist.
  2. Use backup software to perform a tape copy or object copy to a physical tape (Gen 1 only).
  3. Expire media and overwrite cartridges with new data.

Cannot access a storage shelf (HP D2D4100 and 4300 Series Backup Systems)

If you disconnect a storage shelf, you must reconnect it to the same port to which it was orig connected. Do not daisy chain storage shelves.

If backup or replication fails

Backup fails

It is strongly recommended that users check backup application error logs. There are a couple things that may result in errors:

• Exceeding the maximum concurrent jobs
• Exceeding the maximum number of concurrent open files for NAS
• Exceeding the total number of files in a NAS share
• Reconfiguring devices whilst backups are in progress
• Deleting replication mappings

Refer to the D2D Best Practices for VTL, NAS and Replication implementations for recommended and maximum values.

Replication fails

If replication needs to take place through a firewall, the network administrator will need to open (TCP) ports 9387 (Command protocol) and 9388 (Data protocol) to allow the replication traffic to pass to and from the HP StoreOnce Backup Systems. If necessary and the D2Ds conflict with another device on the network, these ports can be changed from the defaults when you create the replication pairing or from the Local Appliance's General Settings page.

If the replication Source Appliance fails and goes offline whilst it was performing a NAS replication job, the replication target share appliance may be left in an inconsistent state. This state may result in failure to recover from some files in the share or perform a list of files in the share because relationships between files and folders have been lost. This will automatically be repaired by the target appliance as soon as it detects the loss of the source appliance, however it may take up 10 minutes to complete this repair during which time the share will not be available for access.

If some files are failing to replicate and remain out of sync for long periods of time, check that backup application is not holding open those files. This can be done by checking that there are no queued or paused jobs in the backup application, or restarting backup application services. If neither action resolves the problem, reboot the backup application server.

Recovering Devices that have 'failed to start' or have become read-only

If the D2D detects a potential issue with data integrity for a Virtual Tape Library or Share it will immediately set the status of that device to 'failed-to-start' or 'read-only', this is to minimize the possibility of any further potential corruption being introduced on the device.

If a device enters one of these states it is reported on the GUI and selecting that device will give you some options to attempt to restore the device to a working state.

Shares CIFS Server HFS Server Shares File shares created on the D2D Backup System are intended to be used as targets for backup applications. They should not be used as general purpose storage or for drag-and-drop backups, doing so will result in lower deduplication efficiency and performance. Name Role Status Access Protocol User Data Stored Size On Disk Created Last Modified Share2 Non Replicating Failed to start OIFS 2.1 GB 1.0 GB 12:58 2013/05/15 17:47 2013/06/03 Share3 Non Replicating Online OIFS - - 12:58 2013/05/15 12:58 2013/05/15 Share1 Non Replicating Online OIFS 1.1 GB 1.0 GB 17:10 2013/05/15 13:34 2013/05/15 Share7 Non Replicating Device(s) in read-only mode NFS 4.6 TB 2.8 TB 15:06 2013/05/20 13:00 2013/05/29 Share8 Non Replicating Online OIFS 13.9 GB 1 MB 10:31 2013/05/23 11:46 2013/05/23 Create Share Share2 Share Damaged An integrity error has been discovered on this share and it has been disabled to prevent further errors. There are various options to attempt to restore this share to a working state: • Quick Repair - Force the share to ignore the integrity error and restart. • Repair - Attempt to repair disk errors on the system. This will require a reboot and your D2D Backup System may be unavailable for some time. • Recover - Clone the share. This will create a new share with the same details and interface information. You will get the option to recover good data. Note: If you have already recovered this share then it is safe to remove. Click here for more information Quick Repair Repair Recover

Three options are available:

  • Quick Repair: This forces the device to ignore the error condition and the device is restarted. However, if following a quick repair the D2D continues to detect a possible integrity error then the status may once again return to 'failed to start' or 'read-only'. If this is the case, it recommended that you try the Repair or Recover option. Running the quick repair option on a failed device more than once is not recommended as this can lead to further corruption.
  • Repair: This reboots the D2D Backup System and during the boot-up process the disks are checked for errors. Once the D2D has finished rebooting, if the device can now be safely returned to an online state, it will be returned to that state automatically. If the device remain

in a 'failed to start' or 'read-only' state following the reboot it is recommended that you either the Quick Repair or Recover Option.

- Recover: The Recover process will clone the device, creating an identical device with identical configuration, including any replication mappings. You will also have the option to clone the data to the new device. Click the Recover button to display the following dialog box.

Rescue Data Would you like to attempt to rescue the existing data? Important: Only consistent data will be recovered. Corrupt data will not be copied onto the clone share. Cancel No Yes

Select No to create a clone of the device, but no data will be copied. Select Yes to create a clone and also attempt to copy all data from the existing device.

Further information about the Recover process:

- Following successful recovery of a NAS device (CIFS or NFS) you may need to remount the device on your NAS client in order to regain access to it.

- Please note that if you choose to clone all the data the process can potentially take several days if a large amount of data is stored on that device.

Share Recovery In Progress A share recovery process is already running on this share. Once the share has been cloned, you will need to press finish to finalize the process. This will require a system reboot. You will recieve a notification when the cloning is complete. Important: Data recovery is affected by any configured replication blackout windows and will be paused if replication is paused. Click here for more information Abort Finish

If you wish to end the recovery process before it completes, click the Abort button in order to stop the process and undo all changes

It is also only possible to clone all the data if sufficient free space is available on the device.
For example, if the device displays a "size on disk" (see screenshot above) of 500GB, then you will require at least 500GB of free space on the D2D to be available in order for r to succeed.
- After recovery has completed successfully, both the failed device and the replacement device remain on your system and both of these will be using up disk space on your D2D. Who you are happy that you have recovered your data successfully you can manually delete the failed device to free space.
- In some circumstances, the recovery process may be unable to complete due to corruption on the device being recovered. In such circumstances, as much data as possible is cloned to replacement store and the process is paused. You will then be prompted to contact HP Su for further assistance.

IMPORTANT: During the recovery process, a new device is created with the name MYSTORE_RESCUED (where MYSTORE is the name of the failed device). Once the recovery process has completed successfully and the server is rebooted the names of the two devices are swapped so that the failed store is now called MYSTORE_RESCUED and the new replacement device is called MYSTORE.

StoreOnce Backup System configuration problems

I cannot see a newly created VTL device

When you create a new device on the HP StoreOnce Backup System, the host will not be able to see the device until you connect manually to it using the iSCSI Initiator or it has been zoned corr on the Fibre Channel SAN. See the HP StoreOnce Backup System Installation and Configurat Guide for more information. If you still cannot see the device, check Device Manager to make sure it is visible from the host.

I cannot see additional slots from the backup application

When you create additional slots for an autoloader/library on the HP StoreOnce Backup System, you may need to restart services on the backup application so that it can see the new slots.

I cannot recover the configuration file

You can only recover a configuration file to an HP StoreOnce Backup System if no devices (NAS shares or Virtual Tape Libraries) have been created on that appliance. This option should only be used in emergencies, when the HP StoreOnce Backup System has lost both disks and the disk configuration on the USB stick.

Upgrade licenses

Can I transfer the License To Use to a different HP D2D?

No. The LTU is tied uniquely to the serial number of your HP D2D hardware. If your hardware serial number changes (by swapping out the unit motherboard), the LTU must be transferred to the new hardware via the HP Licensing website. A new LTU is generated, which must then be applied and activated via the Web Management Interface on the repaired/replaced system.

More disks present than are licensed

If the Disk Licensing status on the Summary page states that more disks are present than are licensed, you need to obtain and apply a License To Use key. See License (Administration) (page 94).

Replacement of hardware

In the unlikely event that replacement hardware is required to be installed, please consult the Maintenance and Service Guide on http://www.hp.com/support. This User Guide also contains information about replacing a failed disk.

Event log displays 'Invalid BIOS Assembly name'

This event log entry and email alert will occur if a motherboard has been replaced on your HP D2D. This is a warning message, designed for future expansion of the system. Your HP D2D will operate fully without impacting anything. This message will occur each time you restart your HP D2D system.

If the RAID battery fails

The RAID battery normally has a status of OK, which means that is fully charged or in the process of recharging. (It is normal for the battery to recharge, if the HP D2D has been powered off for more than 24 hours.) If the RAID battery status shows as failed, it must be replaced. (HP D2D4100/4300 Series on the Summary or Storage—RAID pages; HP D2D2500 Series on the Summary or RAID page)

Upgrades to component parts

You may receive notification of upgrades to system components, such as hard disk drives and BIOS, from time to time, independently of upgrades to the HP StoreOnce Backup System softw Use the Support page to check the current status of these components and determine whether upgrade is required, see Support (Administration) (page 91).

You will find comprehensive instructions for applying these upgrades with the release notes that accompany the download.

  1. Go to http://www.hp.com/support/downloads.
  2. Under storage, click Disk Storage Systems.
  3. Under Disk-to-disk Backup, click HP StorageWorks D2D Backup Systems.
  4. Choose your HP StoreOnce Backup System and then click Cross operating system (BIOS, Firmware, Diagnostics, etc).
  5. In the Description column of the table, click the title that corresponds to software upgrade to you require. Read the release notes and follow the instructions to carry out the upgrade.

14 Hard disk replacement

In this chapter:

•RAID
•How do I know a disk has failed?
•Replacing a hot-plug hard disk
•After replacing the failed disk

RAID

RAID 6

RAID 6 provides protection against double disk failures and failures while a single disk is rebuildin. The following HP StoreOnce Backup Systems are RAID 6 devices.

• HP D2D4312 and HPD2D4324 Backup Systems
•HP D2D4106 and HP D2D4112 Backup Systems

The HP StoreOnce Backup System head unit is protected by a RAID 6 volume, and each Capacit Upgrade Kit is protected by a separate RAID 6 volume. Therefore the head and each Capacity Upgrade Kit can experience a double disk failure without incurring a data loss.

These HP StoreOnce Backup Systems also have an online spare disk on each shelf, which will automatically be incorporated into the RAID if a disk fails. This means that actual storage capacity is approximately 75% of the physical storage capacity for the main unit and each Capacity Upgra Kit connected to it.

  • 18 TB for the HP D2D4324 Backup System and 18 TB for each of up to three Capacity Upgrade Kits
  • 9 TB for the HP D2D4312 Backup System and 9 TB for each of up to three Capacity Upgrade Kits
  • 9 TB for the HP D2D4112 Backup System and 9 TB for an attached Capacity Upgrade Kit
  • 4.5 TB for the HP D2D4106 Backup System and 4.5 TB for an attached Capacity Upgrade Kit

RAID 5

The following HP StoreOnce Backup Systems are RAID 5 devices.

•HP D2D2504 Backup Systems
•HP D2D2502 Backup Systems

RAID 5 stores parity data across all the physical drives in the array. If a drive fails, the controller uses the parity data and the data on the remaining drives to reconstruct data from the failed drive. The system continues operating with a slightly reduced performance until you replace the failed drive. RAID 5 requires an array with a minimum of three physical drives. For the HP StoreOnce Backup System, which has four disks, 25% of the total logical drive storage capacity is used for parity data.

This means that actual storage capacity is approximately:

•1.5 TB for the HP D2D2502i Backup System
•3.0 TB for the HP D2D2504i Backup System

How do I know a disk has failed?

The Disk online LED (1) on the failed disk shows amber.

Figure 27 Drive LEDs
Diagram showing two labeled components (1 and 2) with circular elements inside a rectangular frame, likely representing a mechanical or electrical assembly.

NOTE: For more information about these LEDs refer to Drive LEDs (page 118).

Identifying a failed disk on the Web Management Interface

The Web Management Interface identifies failed or predictive failed disks.

  • HP D2D4300 and HP D2D4100 Series Backup Systems operate correctly with up to two failed disks on the HP D2D and up to two failed disks in any Capacity Upgrade Kit that installed.
  • HP D2D2500 Series Backup Systems operate correctly with one failed disk.

It is important to replace a failed or predictive failed disks as soon as possible. Any subsequent disk failure will result in complete data loss.

NOTE: The first disk (HP D2D4300 Series) or the 12th disk (HP D2D4100 Series) on the internal shelf and the 12th disk on any expansion shelves are the online spare disks. If a disk fails, it online spare disk will immediately be used to replace it. The RAID rebuild process occurs automatically. The failed disk should always be replaced as soon as possible.

Summary page information

Look at the Summary page. For example:

  • HP D2D4100/4300 Series: If it shows see that RAID is building, but is fully operational and that Storage needs attention, this probably means that a disk has failed and the online sp is being used. The Storage (Status) tabs will provide more information.
  • HP D2D2500 Series: If you can see that RAID status has failed, but it is recoverable, this means that one disk has failed.

Figure 28 Summary page with RAID status warning (example shows HP D2D4112)
Summary System Information IP Address (1) 60.30, 125, 132 MAC Address (1) CC/CC-C4/CF/SD/SS IPV% Address (1) Net0: 21c EAT Net1:525M4 Name CC088-02C0800NR Network Name CC086-CC0803NR Up Time 23 Hours 12 Minutes Serial Number : - Status System State OK Network Network Port 1: FGBa Network Port 2: Not Configured Fibre Channel PC Port 1: Not Used PC Port 2: Not Used Disk Space Used 100 MB of IT TB (6%) Decuplication - User Data Stored 0 B Storage Storage needs attention RAID Requiring RAID System, Disk failure has occurred but the RAID System is still operational with full capacity RAID Battery OK Devilute OK Replication Not licensed as a Replication Target

Figure 29 Summary page with RAID status warning (example shows HP D2D2500 Series
Summary System Information IP Address (1) 16.26.12.82 MAC Address (1) 00.1C.C4.F1.A0.84 IPVS Address (1) fa80:21c.p4ff.toe1.a08a/64 Name AB4C26 Network Name AB4C26.emce.hpqcorp.net Up Time 3 Hours 30 Minutes Serial Number CR201AA140 Status System State Disk failure has occurred but the RAID System is still operational with full capacity Network Network Port 1: 1Gb/s Network port net configured Disk Space Allocated 3 GB of 2209 GB (0%) Deduplication Ratio (11.5 : 1) Cartridge Data Usage 17 GB RAID Failed, recoverable RAID Battery The RAID battery backup is ok Tape Attach No Physical Tape Drive(s)

Status page information (HP D2D2500 Series)

Look at the RAID (Status) page for more information. The RAID Status section shows that a disk has failed but it is recoverable. No data has been lost. The information in the Physical Disks section identifies the disk that has failed. This is the disk that you must replace.

Figure 30 Identifying the failed disk (HP D2D2500 Series)
Disk RAID iSCSI Log Raid Status RAID RAID State Failed, recoverable RAID Battery The RAID battery backup is ok Physical Disk Disk Description Serial No FW Version Size State Disk 1 ATA GB0750C4414 5QD2TMTP HPG3 750 GB Failed Disk 2 ATA GB0750C4414 5QD2PM6D HPG3 750 GB OK Disk 3 ATA GB0750C4414 5QD2TT5V HPG3 750 GB OK Disk 4 ATA GB0750C4414 5QD2RIXE HPG3 750 GB OK

Status page information (HP D2D4300/4100 Series)

Both the Storage Pool and RAID tabs report that there is a problem with disks, but do not id the failed disk.

Figure 31 Storage Pool tab with RAID status warning (HP D2D4300/4100 Series)
Storage iSCM Fibre Channel Log Storage Storage Pool Status OK Storage Manager Status OK Storage Pool RAID Shelves Storage Pool Storage Pool Id Status Number of Shelves 1 One or more disks are missing or failed 2 Rebuilding RAID System Discover Delete Configured Shelves Shelf Status Configuration State Disks 0 OK Configured 11-1 1 One or more disks are missing or failed Configured 11-0 Rebuilding RAID System Create Add

Figure 32 RAID tab with RAID status warning (HP D2D4300/4100 Series)
Storage iSCI Fibre Channel Log Storage Storage Pool Status OK Storage Manager Status OK Storage Pool RAID Shelves RAID Controllers RAID Battery 1 OK Logical Units Logical Unit Status RAID Status Logical Unit #8 Size 3 OK OK AA0E7CE0P0869UJ9SVR01G34A4 104 MB 1 OK AA0E7CDSP0869UJ9SVR01G37F6 9 TB 2 One or more disks are missing or failed OK AA0F4C72P0869UJ9SVR01G0F71 104 MB 3 One or more disks are missing or failed Rebuilding. Rebuild 1 % complete AA0F4C85P0869UJ9SVR01G30B9 9 TB Rebuilding RAID System Close

To find out which physical disk has failed and its location, look at the Shelves tab. Use the Beacon function on the Storage-Shelves page to locate the physical disk in the shelf.

Figure 33 Identifying the failed disk(s) (HP D2D4300/4100 Series)
Storage ISC51 Fibre Channel Log Storage Storage Pool Status Storage Manager Status Intrinsic storage configuration OK Storage Pool RAID Shelves Shelves Shift Status Configuration State Disks 1 OK Configured 12 2 On or more data are missing or failed Configured 12 Rebuilding RAID System Physical Disks Disk State Description Serial No FW Version Size Space Beacon Disk 1 OK GB1000EAF/L SQJ0RSVQ HP01 1 TB □ Disk 2 OK GB1000EAF/L SQJ0VYU HP01 1 TB □ Disk 3 OK GB1000EAF/L SQJ0V70Z HP01 1 TB □ Disk 4 OK GB1000EAF/L SQJ0V4J8 HP01 1 TB □ Disk 5 OK GB1000EAF/L SQJ0VYYB HP01 1 TB □ Disk 6 OK GB1000EAF/L SQJ0V50Z HP01 1 TB □ Disk 7 OK GB1000EAF/L SQJ0VZ83 HP01 1 TB □ Disk 8 Failed GB1000EAF/L SQJ0VW9G HP01 1 TB □ -

If you have a system console

The optional system console is a useful tool for monitoring disk status. If you have connected a system console, as described in the Installation and Configuration Guide, an Attention message is displayed against the RAID Status Level if a disk fails and the failed disk can easily be identified in the RAID section.

NOTE: The system console is password protected. It uses the same password as the Web Management Interface.

Figure 34 System console showing failed disks (HP D2D2500 Series)
HP StorageWorks D2D Backup System (AB4026.emea.hpqcorp.net) HP StorageWorks D2D Backup System MENU *Network... Shutdown... BIOS C13 11/26/2007 Firmware ai85 001.986 System State Running System Status Level Caution Processor OK OK OK OK Network Status Level OK BIOS OK RAID Status Level Caution Production Data OK Disk Status Level OK Configuration OK RAID Attention Usage 1GB / 2200GB Disks 01:--- 02:OK 03:OK 04:OK Tape Attach Drives 0 Fort 1 AB4026.emea.hpqcorp.net IPv4 16.26.12.82 IPv6 fe80::21c:c4ff:feel:a08a/64 State Up:1Gb/s Configures the network settings.

If you are using iLO2

The Remote Console option under iLO2 also allows you to monitor disk status. It provides similar information to the system console, described in the previous section, and is also password protected. It uses the same password as the Web Management Interface.

If you have email alerts

If you have configured recipients for email alerts on the Web Management Interface, they will be notified of a disk failure with a message similar to the following.

Example email from an HP D2D4100/4300 Series Backup System

**************************
This is a system generated message from your HP StoreOnce D2D Backup System
Email Notification From D2D-CZC8033MWR

31-Mar-2009 8:32:57 : Storage RAID Logical Drive AA587361P98690J9SVP01GCD82
Catastrophically Failed

31-Mar-2009 8:32:57 : Storage RAID Logical Drive AA58736DP98690J9SVP01G5251
Catastrophically Failed

31-Mar-2009 8:32:57 : Physical disk 5QK0AQKG failed

31-Mar-2009 8:32:57 : Physical disk 5QK0AN7T failed

31-Mar-2009 8:32:57 : Physical disk 5QK0ANMP failed

For further information please browse to
https://D2D-CZC8033MWR.emea.hpqcorp.net (https://16.26.133.71)
Please do not reply to this email.
************************** 

Example email from an HP D2D2500 Series Backup System

This is a system generated message from your HP StoreOnce D2D Backup System
Email Notification From AB4027
20-May-2008 16:20:54 : Disk failure has occurred but the RAID System is still operational with full capacity
20-May-2008 16:20:54 : RAID Disk 1 Failed
For further information please browse to
https://AB4027.emea.hpqcorp.net (https://16.26.11.104) 

Please do not reply to this email.

The Event Log

The Log also contains warning messages if a disk fails.

Figure 35 Log showing disk failure (HP D2D4300/4100 Series)
Storage ISC SI Fibre Channel\Log Log Messages + Show Search Box Data Time Severity Message 2009/01/16 10:03 Notification Email sent to wojciech.gjdyaz@ho.com 2009/01/16 10:03 System Status Warning 2009/01/16 10:03 Disk failure has occurred but the RAID System is still operational with full capacity 2009/01/16 10:03 Rebuilding RAID System 2009/01/16 10:03 Rebuilding Storage RAID Logical Drive AA0F4C85P8689CJ9SVP01GJCB9 2009/01/16 10:03 One or more disks have failed on Storage RAID Logical Drive AA0F4C72P8689CJ9SVP01GF071 but it is still operational 2009/01/16 9:48 Event Log Cleared Clear Log

Replacing a hot-plug hard disk

  1. Identify the disk that has failed as described in How do I know a disk has failed? (page 137).

NOTE: Remember you can use the Beacon LED to identify the physical disk in the unit.

  1. HP D2D4100 Series: The hard drives installed in the server are labeled from device 1 to device 12, from left to right, top to bottom, when viewed from the front of the server.

HP D2D4300 Series: The hard drives in the internal shelf are installed in two columns in the server and each column is physically labeled from device 1 to device 6, bottom to top. When viewed from the front of the server, the disks 1 to 6 in the far-right column relate to disks 1 to 6 on the Web Management Interface. The disks 1 to 6 in the inner column relate to disks 7 to 12 on the Web Management Interface. In the expansion shelves, they are installed in four columns and are labeled from top to bottom, left to right.

HP D2D2500 Series: The drive bays are labeled from device 1 to device 4, from left to ri when viewed from the front of the server.

Figure 36 Disk numbering (HP D2D4100 Series)
1 2 4 5 7 10 3 6 8 9 11 12

Figure 37 Disk numbering (HP D2D2500 Series)
Diagram of a server rack with numbered components labeled 1 to 4

Figure 38 Disk numbering of the internal shelf (HP D2D4300 Series)
6(12) 5(11) 4(10) 3(9) 2(8) 1(7) 6(6) 5(5) 4(4) 3(3) 2(2) 1(1)

NOTE: The red lettering indicates the disk number on the Web Management Interface.

Figure 39 Disk numbering of expansion shelves (HP D2D4300/4100 Series)
1 2 4 5 7 10 3 6 8 9 11 12

  1. Remove the disk.

  2. Press the hard disk carrier button (1) to release the ejector lever.

  3. Pull out the disk carrier handle (2) and slide the hard drive assembly (3) out of the drive bay. Be sure to support the drive when pulling it out of the cage.

Figure 40 Removing the hard drive (example shows D2D4100 Series)
Technical diagram showing server rack assembly with labeled components and directional arrows indicating movement or flow.

  1. Replace the failed disk with the new disk.

Push the hard drive assembly (1) into the drive bay until it stops and press the HDD carr latch (2) inward until it clicks.

Figure 41 Installing a replacement hard disk
Technical diagram of a server rack with labeled components and directional arrows indicating movement or flow.

  1. Log in to the Web Management Interface and look at the appropriate Status pages.

HP D2D4100/4300 Series: Select Storage-Shelves. The status of the failed disk should now be OK. The RAID will rebuild automatically but can take up to 5 hours. The RAID State field on the Storage-RAID tab displays the Percentage Complete.

HP D2D2500 Series: Select RAID. The status of the failed disk should now be OK. The RAID will rebuild automatically but can take up to 5 hours. The RAID Status section displays the Percentage Complete.

Figure 42 RAID rebuilding (HP D2D2500 Series)
Disk RAID ISCST Log Raid Status RAID State Rebuilding Percentage Complete 60 % RAID Battery The RAID battery backup is ok Physical Disk Disk Description Serial No FW Version Size State Disk 1 ATA GB0750C4414 5QD2TVTP HPG3 750 GB OK Disk 2 ATA GB0750C4414 5QD2PN6D HPG3 750 GB OK Disk 3 ATA GB0750C4414 5QD2TT5V HPG3 750 GB OK Disk 4 ATA GB0750C4414 5QD2R-IXE HPG3 750 GB OK

After replacing the failed disk

When you replace a disk, the RAID initialization process starts. The D2D is fully functional during this time, however may have reduced performance until the process completes and initialization progress is 100%.

NOTE: This can take a very long time to complete, even when the appliance is idle.

Email alerts and Log

If you have configured recipients for email alerts on the Web Management Interface, they will notified that physical disk(s) added, RAID is being rebuilt and when the rebuild has completed. The Log also contains an entry when the RAID rebuild completes.

If you have a system console or are using the iLO2 Remote Console

The disks are shown as OK, but a message is displayed against the RAID Status Level while RAID is rebuilding.

Figure 43 System console during RAID rebuild (HP D2D4300 Series)

HP StorageWorks D2D Backup System
MENU Network... *Shutdown... Reset... Logout...BIOS P63 03/30/2010Firmware 200.
System State Running
System Status Level OKProcessors OK
Network Status Level OKBIOS OK
RAID Status Level CautionProduction Data OK
Disk Status Level OKConfiguration OK
FCP Status Level OKFirmware Module OK
System Memory OK
Storage Configured : 1 Shelf : Online Shelves 1:10+1 Rebld:5%
1G Port 3 D2D-CZJ9340846. IPv4 IPv6 2620:0:a17:e020:225:b3ff:feaa:d862/64 State Up
Session: Logged Out

Figure 44 System console during RAID rebuild (HP D2D2500 Series)
HP StorageWorks D2D Backup System (AB4026.emea.hpqcorp.net) MENU *Network... Shutdown... BIOS C13 11/26/2007 Firmware ai85 001.986 System State Running System Status Level Caution Processor OK OK OK OK Network Status Level OK BIOS OK RAID Status Level Caution Production Data OK Disk Status Level OK Configuration OK RAID Rebuilding 66% Usage 1GB / 2200GB Disks 01:OK 02:OK 03:OK 04:OK Tape Attach Drives 0 Port 1 AB4026.emea.hpqcorp.net IPv4 16.26.12.82 IPv6 fe80::2lc:c4If:feel:a08a/64 State Up:1Gb/s Configures the network settings.

If several disks fail

If several disk failures are reported at once, it is possible that the disks are fine while some other component has failed. In these situations care should be taken to rule out the possibilities of loose/broken cables, faulty RAID controllers or powered-down Capacity Upgrade Kits before replacing the disks. If the problem lies with components other than the disks, then there is a very good chance that no actual data loss has occurred.

NOTE: If the System State shows that RAID has failed catastrophically and no RAID devices are available, the HP Smart Array RAID controller has failed and needs replacing. See the HP D2D Backup System Maintenance and Service Guide for more information.

Replacing the disks (HP D2D2500 Series)

If more than one disk fails on the HP D2D2500 Series, you will lose all data on the HP StoreOf Backup System and the message on the Summary page warns that the RAID system has failed catastrophically. The RAID is not recoverable.

Figure 45 Status showing multiple disk failure (HP D2D2500 Series)
Status System State RAID System Catastrophically Failed Network ✓ Network Port 1: 1Gb/s ✓ Network Port 2: Not Configured Disk Space Allocated ✓ 0 GB of 0 GB (0%) Deduplication Ratio ✓ - Cartridge Data Usage ✓ 0 MB RAID RAID has failed and is not recoverable

The device operating system is not stored on any of the disks, so the HP StoreOnce Backup S is still usable after replacing the failed disks. Use the RAID (Status) page of the Web Management Interface or the System Console to help you identify the disks that have failed.

Figure 46 RAID showing two disk failures (HP D2D2500 Series)
Disk RAID ISC$I Log Raid Status RAID State 1 RAID has failed and is not recoverable RAID Battery 2 The RAID battery backup is ok Physical Disks Disk Description Serial No FW Version Size State Disk 1 ATA GB0750C4414 5QD2TW7P HPC3 750 GB Failed Disk 2 ATA GB0750C4414 5QD2PW6D HPC3 750 GB OK Disk 3 ATA GB0750C4414 5QD2TTSV HPC3 750 GB OK Disk 4 ATA GB0750C4414 5QD2RHXE HPC3 750 GB Failed

Replace the disks, as described earlier in this chapter. When you power on again, the RAID not rebuild automatically. The Summary page continues to show the RAID System as catastrophic failed. If you look at the Devices or Cartridges page, no information is available other than the library is awaiting RAID initialization.

Figure 47 Devices page awaiting RAID initialization (HP D2D2500 Series)

NameCartridgesConnectionDevice TypePort
Library 124Analog RMS informationVSL 03 Series (2x24) / LTD. 5FCD Port
Creative library

If you have the System Console connected you will see Fault conditions for System Status and Status and that the RAID is not mounted, even though the disks are shown as OK.

Figure 48 System console after two disks are replaced (HP D2D2500 Series)

System StateRunning
System Status LevelFaultProcessorOK OK OK OK
Network Status LevelOKBIOSOK
RAID Status LevelFaultProduction DataOK
Disk Status LevelOKConfigurationOK
Firmware ModuleOK
RAIDNot MountedUsage 5GB / 2200GB
Disks01:OK 02:OK 03:OK 04:OK

Initialising RAID

You must initiate the RAID rebuild manually on the RAID page in the Web Management Interface. Click on the Initialise button. This will make the HP StoreOnce Backup System usable again, I you will have lost your data. After initialization, the Disk page will show 0% used because all has been lost.

The initialization process may take several hours or a day depending on the process. Once the RAID status parity reaches 100%, the RAID is fully configured (it is still useable whilst initialisir parity with some slight damage to performance).

Disk RAID ISC5F Log Raid Status RAD Stats RAID has failed and is not receivable RAID Battery The RAID battery backup is sk Initiise Physical Disks Disk Description Serial No FW Version Size State Disk 1 ATA GB0750C4414 5QD2TM7P HPG3 750 GB OK Disk 2 ATA GB0750C4414 5QD2PN8D HPG3 750 GB OK Disk 3 ATA GB0750C4414 5QD2TT5V HPG3 750 GB OK Disk 4 ATA GB0750C4414 5QD2RHXE HPG3 750 GB OK

Replacing the disks (HP D2D4300/4100 Series)

If more than two disks fail and the online spare disk has been used on the HP D2D4300/4100 Series, you will lose all data on the HP StoreOnce Backup System and the message on the Sumr page warns that the RAID system has failed catastrophically. The RAID is not recoverable.

Figure 49 Status showing multiple disk failure on one shelf (HP D2D4300/4100 Series)

StorageStorage is faulty
RAIDRAID System Catastrophically Failed, Storage system is available but operating at reduced performance due to RAID Optimisation

The device operating system is not stored on any of the disks, so the HP D2D Backup System is still usable after replacing the failed disks. Use the Beacon function on the Storage-Shelves page of the Web Management Interface or the System Console to help you identify the disks that have failed.

Figure 50 Storage—Shelves showing three disk failures (HP D2D4300/4100 Series)
Storage iSCSI Fibre Channel Log Storage Storage Pool Status Storage Manager Status Offline OK Invalid storage configuration RAID operational but not yet optimised Storage Pool RAID Shelves Shelves Shelf Status Configuration State Disks 0 Invalid Configuration Invalid Configuration 9 1 RAID operational but not yet optimised Configured 12 Physical Disks Disk State Description Serial No FW Version Size Spare Beacon Disk 1 OK GB1000EAFJL 9QJ17GEP HPG6 1 TB □ Disk 2 OK GB1000EAFJL 9QJ14VL3 HPG6 1 TB □ Disk 3 OK GB1000EAFJL 9QJ0S6QG HPG6 1 TB □ Disk 4 Failed GB1000EAFJL 9QJ170YW HPG6 1 TB □ Disk 5 Failed GB1000EAFJL 9QJ15VAB HPG1 1 TB □ Disk 6 Failed GB1000EAFJL 9QJ0R5WQ HPG6 1 TB □ Disk 7 OK GB1000EAFJL 9QJ0W0C3 HPG6 1 TB □ Disk 8 OK GB1000EAFJL 9QJ0VYT4 HPG6 1 TB □ Disk 9 OK GB1000EAFJL 9QJ0SB7C HPG6 1 TB □ Disk 10 OK GB1000EAFJL 9QJ0VY9P HPG6 1 TB □ Disk 11 OK GB1000EAFJL 9QJ0VNRQ HPG6 1 TB □ Disk 12 OK GB1000EAFJL 9QJ0SAPK HPG6 1 TB ✓

IMPORTANT: When you have two (or more) shelves, the disk failures may be on one shelf or and the RAID status of the other shelf is shown as operational. However, you will lose all data the HP StoreOnce Backup System.

Power off and replace the disks, as described earlier in this chapter. When you power on ag the disks are show as OK in the Storage-Shelves page, but the Shelf and Storage Pool both I an invalid configuration.

Figure 51 Storage—Shelves page after replacing disks (HP D2D4300/4100 Series)
Storage iSCSI Fibre Channel Log Storage Storage Pool Status Storage Manager Status Offline OK Invalid storage configuration RAID operational but not yet optimised Storage Pool RAID Shelves Shelves Shelf Status Configuration State Disks 0 invalid Configuration Invalid Configuration 12 1 RAID operational but not yet optimised Configured 12 Physical Disks Disk State Description Serial No FW Version Size Spare Beacon Disk 1 OK GB1000EAFJL 9QJ17GEP HPG6 1 TB □ Disk 2 OK GB1000EAFJL 9QJ14VL3 HPG6 1 TB □ Disk 3 OK GB1000EAFJL 9QJ0S6QG HPG6 1 TB □ Disk 4 OK GB1000EAFJL 9QJ170YW HPG6 1 TB □ Disk 5 OK GB1000EAFJL 9QJ15VAB HPG1 1 TB □ Disk 6 OK GB1000EAFJL 9QJ0R5WQ HPG6 1 TB □ Disk 7 OK GB1000EAFJL 9QJ0W0C3 HPG6 1 TB □ Disk 8 OK GB1000EAFJL 9QJ0VYT4 HPG6 1 TB □ Disk 9 OK GB1000EAFJL 9QJ0SB7C HPG6 1 TB □ Disk 10 OK GB1000EAFJL 9QJ0VY9P HPG6 1 TB □ Disk 11 OK GB1000EAFJL 9QJ0VNRQ HPG6 1 TB □ Disk 12 OK GB1000EAFJL 9QJ0SAPK HPG6 1 TB ✓

Restoring the Storage Pool

You must delete the whole storage pool and rebuild it.

  1. Go to the Storage-Storage Pool tab and click Delete.

Figure 52 Storage-Storage Pool tab, deleting the storage pool
Storage iSCSI Fibre Channel Log Storage Storage Pool Status Storage Manager Status Offline OK Invalid storage configuration RAID operational but not yet optimised Storage Pool RAID Shelves Storage Pool Storage Pool Id Status Number of Shelves 1 Offline 2 Invalid storage configuration RAID operational but not yet optimised Discover Delete

  1. Look at the Summary page to monitor progress. (If you look at the Status—Storage page w storage is being deleted, the system cannot display meaningful storage pool information an it tells you that the storage manager is busy.)

Status System State Network Fibre Channel Disk Space Used User Date Stored Storage RAID Devices Tape Attach Replication Not Running Network Port 1: 1Gbis Network Port 2: Not Configured FC Port 1: Not Used FC Port 2: Not Used OK - 0.0 3 Destroying storage (25%) 1 The RAID device is not available OK OK No Physical Tape Drivers Not licensed as a Replication Target

Status System State ✓ Not Running Network ✓ Network Part 1: 1Go's ✓ Network Part 2: Not Configured Fibre Channel ✓ FC Part 1: Not Used ✓ FC Part 2: Not Used Disk Space Used ✓ OK Deduplication Ratio ✓ - User Data Stored ✓ 0 B Storage ✓ 1 Not Configured RAID ✓ The RAID device is not available RAID Battery ✓ OK Devices ✓ OK Tape Attach ✓ No Physical Tape Drive(s) Replication ✓ Not licensed as a Replication Target

Summary page after storage is deleted Summary page

  1. Go back to the Status-Storage page and click Create in the Configured Shelves section of Storage Pool tab.

Figure 53 Storage-Storage Pool tab, creating the storage pool
Storage i$CSI Fibre Channel Log Storage Storage Pool Status Storage Manager Status Storage Pool not configured Storage Pool RAID Shelves Storage Pool Storage Pool not configured Configured Shelves There are currently no shelves configured Create Add

  1. The system will start creating new storage using all available and licensed shelves. Look at the Summary page to monitor progress.

Status System State Network Fibre Channel Disk Space Used Decduplication Ratio User Data Stored Storage RAID RAID Battery Devices Tape Attach Replication Not Running Network Port 1: 1Gbis Network Port 2: Not Configured FC Port 1: Not Used FC Port 2: Not Used OK - GB Creating storage (11%) The RAID device is not available OK OK No Physical Tape Drivers Not licensed as a Replication Target

Status System State ✓ OK Network ✓ Network Port 1: 1Gb/s ✓ Network Port 2: Not Configured Fibre Channel ✓ FC Port 1: 4Gb/s ✓ FC Port 2: Not Used Disk Space ✓ 105 MB of 17 TB (0%) Used Decuplication ✓ - Ratio User Data ✓ 0 B Stored Storage ✓ OK RAID ✓ Storage system is available but operating at reduced performance due to RAID Optimization RAID Battery ✓ OK Devices ✓ OK Tape Attach ✓ No Physical Tape Drive(s) Replication ✓ Not licensed as a Replication Target

Summary page after storage is created Summary page

  1. The information message advising you that the HP StoreOnce Backup System is optimizing is normal and does not require you to take any action. The status will become OK as soon optimization completes, but it may take some time. If you look at the Status—Storage page, the same message is displayed but all relevant storage pool information is available.

Figure 54 Status—Storage page after storage is created
Storage UCCB File Channel Log Storage Storage Pool Status Storage Manager Status RAID operational but not yet optimised OK Storage Pool RAID Shelves Storage Pool Storage Pool Id Status Number of Shelves 1 RAID operational but not yet optimised E Discover Delete Configured Shelves Shell Status Configuration State Diska 0 RAID operational but not yet optimised Configured 11-1 1 RAID operational but not yet optimised Configured 11-1 Create Add Storage Usage Storage Usage Storage Used 105 MB 0 % Max 17999 GB Storage Allocated 105 MB 0 % Max 17999 GB Odplication Ratio (+) Device Storage Usage Name Number of Cartridges Used Size Odplication Library 1 24 0.08 © 2008 Hewlett-Packard Company, L.P. Language English

Creating cartridges (Virtual Tape Devices only)

All cartridges and data were lost when the disks failed. Before you can use the HP StoreOnce Backup System you must create new cartridges. Use the Create all button to create a blank cartridge of the size/emulation type selected when the library was first configured in all empty slots.

LocationBar CodeUsed SizeMax SizeWrite ProtectedLast Written
Mail Slot#2
LocationBar CodeUsed SizeMax SizeWrite ProtectedLast Written
Tape Drive 1
Location+ Bar CodeUsed SizeMax SizeWrite ProtectedLast Written
Slot 1#2
Slot 2#2
Slot 3#2
Slot 4#2
Slot 5#2
Slot 6#2
Slot 7#2
Slot 8#2

A Extra information for G1 products

Overview

The information in this section is for users who have one of the older G1 products:

•HP D2D2502/2503/2504 G1 Backup Systems
•HP D2D4004/4009 G1 Backup Systems
•HP D2D4112 G1 Backup Systems

How do I know whether I have a G1 or G2 Backup System?

The generation can be identified from the Summary page and the Software page of the Web Management Interface. Look at the Type field, which will state G1 or G2 or look at the Software Revision field. If it shows 1.x.xx software, it is a G1 product; if it shows 2.x.xx software, it is a G2 product.

Major differences

This section highlights areas where the information provided in the main body of this user guide is different for G1 products. It does not provide a definitive list of technical differences. Please to the product specs for detailed information.

VTL devices

G1 products do not support ESL-e or EML-e library emulation and never support more than four drives per library. There may be other restrictions on emulation types that are available dependent upon product type. Unsupported emulation types are not available for selection on the Devices page. The maximum number of libraries and drives that are supported per G1 appliance is given in the following table.

Table 32 Maximum number of libraries and drives per G1 appliance

HP D2D2502iHP D2D2503iHP D2D2504iHP D2D4004 /4009HP D2D4112
Max libraries4681624
Max drives per library41444
Max slots per library (D2DBS)48484896144

NOTE: It is only possible to exceed the maximum physical limitation of 64 devices when configuring the HP D2D4112 Backup System.

Creating cartridges

The procedure is as described in the main guide, apart from the following note that applies if are using Tape Attach.

NOTE: When you import a cartridge, you need an empty mail slot and an empty cartridge to which the backup application can move the imported data. Therefore, you may wish to leave slot whose cartridge has been exported empty, rather than creating a new cartridge. Or to create a slot, edit the Total No Of Cartridge Slots on the Devices page.

NAS devices

G1 products do not support NFS NAS shares; they only support CIFS NAS shares.

Tape Attach

An external or rackmount Ultrium library or tape device may be attached directly to the HP D2D Backup System, allowing the user to store backups offsite. Always refer to http://www.hp.com/go/connect or http://www.hp.com/go/ebs to find out which tape library and tape drive models are supported.

Both SAS and SCSI library and tape devices are supported and require installation of a host bus adapter (HBA); External devices may be half-height or full-height. Rackmount devices are installed in a rackmount enclosure, such as a 1U Rack, 3U Rack or a TapeArray.

With a SCSI interface, up to two tape drives may be connected (including tape drives in libraries and up to two tape operations (import, export or copy) from separate libraries may take place at any one time. With a SAS interface, up to four tape drives may be connected (including tape drives in libraries), and up to four tape operations (import, export or copy) from separate libraries may take place at any one time.

NOTE: Tape Attach is only appropriate if you wish to back up Virtual Tape Devices to a physical tape device connected to the HP D2D Backup System. You cannot back up NAS shares in this way.

The Tape Attach web pages allow you to configure attached tape storage device, run jobs manual create and run job schedules, view status and job history.

NOTE: Physical tape storage devices attached to the HP D2D Backup System can only be accessed by the HP D2D Backup System using the Tape Attach pages. They do not appear as attached network devices to the host system.

Seeding Virtual Tape Devices using Tape Attach

Use the Library or Tape Attach Copy functionality to create a physical cartridge that can be shipped to the site of the Target Appliance and imported. You only need to seed with one full backup.

  1. Host backs up to a Non Replicating library on the Source Appliance.
  2. The first full backup is copied to a cartridge on a Tape Library.
  3. The physical cartridge is shipped to the Data Center.
  4. The first full backup is imported from Tape Library into a Non-Replicating Library on the Target Appliance. It is also possible to import the cartridge into an unmapped slot of an existing Replication-Target library.
  5. Once imported create the replication linkage between Source and Target Appliances and configure slot mappings.
  6. Normal replication across the WAN can now take place with only new or changed data needing to be replicated.

NOTE: When recovering data after a disaster has occurred in the remote site resulting in the loss of both the host servers and the D2D system, you can speed up data recovery to the D2D I using the last full backup cartridge to reverse seed the Virtual Tape Library.

Configuration (Tape Attach)

This page allows you to view physical tape storage devices that are attached to the HP D2D Bad System. The top half of the page shows a list of configured physical tape devices.

NOTE: With a SCSI interface, up to two tape drives may be connected (including tape drives in libraries), and up to two tape operations (import, export or copy) from separate libraries may take place at any one time. With a SAS interface, up to four tape drives may be connected (including tape drives in libraries), and up to four tape operations (import, export or copy) from separate libraries may take place at any one time.

NOTE: Standard HP Ultrium barcodes should be applied to all cartridges in libraries to ensure correct media type identification.

Select a device to display its details in the lower half of the page. There are four tabs in the section: Devices, Cartridges, Support and Software.

D2D Backup System Home Virtual Tape Devices NAS Configuration Status Tape Attach Replication Administration d2dguikevpic02 : IPV4 16.26.130.91 : IPV6 2620:0:a17:e020:21a:4bff:febc:ccb0/64 Configuration Manual Jobs Scheduled Jobs Active Jobs Job History Physical Tape Devices Name Device Type Vendor Product Name HP Ultrium 0:0:0:0 Standalone HP Ultrium 4-SCSI Rescan Physical Tape Device Details Devices Cartridges Support Firmware HP Ultrium 0:0:0:0 Name HP Ultrium 0:0:0:0 Product ID Ultrium 4-SCSI Serial Number HU17350AEW Firmware Version 012.823 Edit Language English © 2009 Hewlett-Packard Company, L.P.

Adding tape storage devices to the list

Devices appear in the list as long as they are connected at power on. If you subsequently attach an external or rack-mounted tape storage device after power on, click Rescan to add it to the list of devices.

IMPORTANT:

When using a physical tape library or autoloader connected to the D2D device, always ensure that when first connected or prior to a rescan, all cartridges within the device have been returned to their slots. In order to do this it may be necessary to move cartridges from the tape drive(s) of their slots manually via the library front panel. Failure to do this will result in tape offload job failing to start and remaining in queued state."

Viewing and editing tape device details

Select a specific tape device and click the Devices tab to display additional information about it and any embedded tape drives. This information tells you the device's serial number and softw version.

For tape libraries, it also tells you the total number of slots, mail slots and embedded tape drive. Details for any embedded tape drives are included below the tape device details. You can use this to find out the Ultrium generation of the embedded tape drive, its serial number and software version and the barcode of any cartridge that is loaded.

Click Edit. You can only change the Name of the tape device. This is the name that is used to identify the tape device on the HP D2D Web Management Interface. None of the other details may be edited.

Viewing cartridge details

Click the Cartridges tab to display a list of slots with details of bar codes and the maximum size of any cartridges in those slots. The maximum size is the raw capacity with no data compress. You cannot edit these details.

D2D Backup System Home Virtual Tape Devices NAS Configuration Status Tape Attach Replication Administration D2DB5-CR20645113 IPV4 16.28.130.91 IPV6 2620.0.e17.e020.21a 48f9ebc ccb094 Configuration Manual Jobs Scheduled Jobs Active Jobs Job History Physical Tape Devices Name Device Type Vendor Product Name HP Ultrium 0.0.0 Standalone HP Ultrium 4-SCSI Rescan Physical Tape Device Details Devices Cartridges Support Firmware Location Barcode Max Size Tape Drive 1 GICE5DDL 800.0 GB Language English © 2005 Hewlett-Packard Company, L.P.

Obtaining support

Click on the Support tab.

•The general support enquiries link takes you to HP Support web pages.
- With tape libraries a link is provided so that you can generate a support ticket from the library GUI. This link takes you to the Command View MSL login.

D2D Backup System Home Virtual Tape Devices NAS Configuration Status Tape Attach Replication Administration D2DBS-CR20545113 IPV4 15.26.130.91 IPV5 2620.0 a17e20.21a.eeffebc.ccb064 Configuration Manual Jobs Scheduled Jobs Active Jobs Job History Physical Tape Devices Name Device Type Vendor Product Name HP Uthium 0.000 Standalone HP Uthium 4-SCSI Rescan Physical Tape Device Details Devices Cartridges Support Firmware Support For general support enquiries Click here Language English © 2009 Hewlett-Packard Company, LP

Upgrading tape storage device firmware

As long as the tape device is supported, you can also upgrade the firmware from this screen. CI on the Firmware tab.

  • For tape drives you can upload firmware that you have downloaded from the HP web site. Please refer to http://www.hp.com/support for details of the latest firmware for your HP Ultrium Tape Library or Tape Drive and download required files to a location on your host machine before you use this page.
  • For tape libraries a link is provided so that you can use the library GUI. This link takes you to the Command View MSL login.

NOTE: If you update firmware on an attached physical tape device that has a cartridge loaded at the time, the cartridge will be unloaded by the firmware update.

D2D Backup System Home Virtual Tape Devices NAS Configuration Status Tape Attach Replication Administration D2DBS CR20545113: IPVI 16.26.130.91: IPVS 2620.0 a17/eC20.21a:dtf.boc.ccb064 Configuration Manual Jobs Scheduled Jobs Active Jobs Job History Physical Tape Devices Name Device Type Vendor Product Name HP Ultium 0 0 0:0 Standalone HP Ultium 4-SCS Rescan Physical Tape Device Details Devices Cartridges Support Firmware Firmware Standalone drive firmware upgrade FW Upgrade Language English © 2009 Hewlett Packard Company, L.P.

Manual jobs (Tape Attach)

This page provides a wizard that allows you to initiate an immediate import, export or copy operation.

  • A copy operation may be performed upon any non blank cartridge in any numbered slot in a library device on the HP D2D Backup System. The cartridge data is copied from the H D2D Backup System to the physical tape storage device.
  • An export operation may be performed upon any non blank cartridge in the mail slot in a library device on the HP D2D Backup System. The cartridge data is first copied from the D2D Backup System to the physical tape storage device and then subsequently deleted from the HP D2D Backup System.
  • An import operation may be performed on a physical cartridge in the attached tape drive. The data is copied to the target device on the HP D2D Backup System. The operation will automatically create a new cartridge in the mail slot of a library device.

NOTE: With SAS devices, up to four tape operations (import, export or copy) from separate libraries may take place at any one time. If four jobs are already running concurrently, a wait message will be displayed when you try to set up the new job. You must wait for one of the jobs to complete. With SCSI devices, the number of concurrent operations is limited to two.

Manual Tape Job Wizard ✓ Welcome ▶ Select Cartridge Configure Job Summary Step 1 - Select Cartridge The purpose of this step is to select the source cartridge. ライブラリ 1 Location Barcode Used Size Max Size.Write Protected Last Written Job Type Visit Slot Import Items Per Page: 200 Location Barcode Used Size Max Size.Write Protected Scheduled Last Written Job Type Set 1 CAF8CF34 Bank 1600 GB - Set 2 CAF8CF35 064 MB 1600 GB 16-Feb-2011 Copy 11:05 Set 3 CAF8CF36 Bank 1600 GB - Set 4 CAF8CF37 Bank 1600 GB - Set 5 CAF8CF38 Bank 1600 GB - Set 6 CAF8CF39 Bank 1600 GB - Set 7 CAF8CF3A Bank 1600 GB - Set 8 CAF8CF3B Bank 1600 GB - Items Per Page: 200 < Back Next > Cancel Help

There are two steps in this wizard:

  1. Select the slot on the HP D2D library that should be used for the copy, export or import job.
  2. Select the slot on the physical tape storage device.

To select cartridges on the HP D2D library

Select the Library in the Virtual Devices list at the top of the page to display a list of the cartridge in that library.

  • There is a Copy label in the far column next to any numbered slot that does not have a blank cartridge.
  • There is an Export label in the far column next to the mail slot if it contains a non blank cartridge.
    • There is an Import label in the far column next to the mail slot if it contains no cartridge.

To copy to attached tape storage device

  1. Locate the cartridge that you wish to copy in the Cartridge list and click on the slot to select it. If it is a valid slot, the Next button is active. Blank slots or slots that have already been assigned to scheduled jobs are not valid selections for manual jobs.
  2. Click on Next to display the second page of the wizard. (Or report an error if no tape storage devices are currently attached to the HP D2D Backup System.)

Manual Tape Job Wizard ✓ Welcome ✓ Select Cartridge ► Configure Job Summary Step 2 - Configure Job The purpose of this step is to configure the job, including target device, verification and tape selection. Manual Job Details Library Name ライブラリ 1 Mode Copy Source ライブラリ 1 - Slot 2 (OAF80F35) Please select attached tape device HP Ultrum 0.0.0 Please select verify / compare option Full Untitled After Completion < Back Next > Cancel Help

  1. Select the attached tape storage device from the pull-down list, the required physical slot if it is a tape library, the required verify/compare option and whether the physical cartridge should be unloaded after the operation completes.

NOTE: A Full Verify reads the data back after copy and compares it byte-by-byte with the original. A Quick Verify also reads back the data, but only ensures that it can be read. It may save some time if another tape device on the HP D2D Backup System is being accessed at the same time as the copy operation. No Verify is the fastest option.

NOTE: On physical tape libraries the unload after completion option moves the cartridge to the mail slot if the mail slot is enabled and empty.

  1. Click Create.

  2. The process checks that media is loaded in the attached tape storage device and that it is blank. If it is not blank, you are given the option of overwriting it or canceling the job. (It is not possible to append data.) It also checks that there is cartridge data to be copied (it may have been subsequently moved by the backup application).

NOTE: In the case of libraries some of these checks can only be made after loading the cartridge in a tape drive, which takes approximately one minute.

  1. The Job Status page is displayed and you can view progress in the final column.

To export to attached tape storage device

Data can only be exported from the mail slot. Once data has been exported it is removed from the HP D2D Backup System. However, if an error occurs during the process, the data is not allowed. It remains on the cartridge located in the mail slot. Export is not recommended with deduplicating libraries as it does very little to free up disk space, which is the prime reason for export. (Sp. is only freed up, if a chunk of data is no longer referenced by any cartridges.)

The preferred option is to use the backup application on the host to move the cartridge into email slot. This action removes the cartridge from the numbered slot and leaves the slot empty also ensures that the backup application is in sync with the status of cartridges on the HP D2 Backup applications have a number of terms to describe this action, such as remove or eject. to the documentation supplied with your backup application for further details. You can also m cartridges manually from the Web Management Interface, see Cartridges (Virtual Tape Devices) (page 18).

Δ

CAUTION: Do not export cartridges that the backup application uses on a frequent basis as part of a rotation strategy.

  1. Click on the mail slot in the Cartridge list and press the Next button.

NOTE: The Export function is only active if the mail slot contains a cartridge with data on it (there is an Export label in the right column of the mail slot).

  1. This displays the second page of the wizard. (Or reports an error if no tape storage device are currently attached to the HP D2D Backup System.)

  2. Select the attached tape drive from the pull-down list, the required physical slot if it is a tape library, the required verify/compare option and whether the physical cartridge should be unloaded after the operation completes.

NOTE: A Full Verify reads the data back after copy and compares it byte-by-byte with the original. A Quick Verify also reads back the data, but only ensures that it can be read. It may save some time if another tape device on the HP D2D Backup System is being accessed the same time as the copy operation. No Verify is the fastest option.

NOTE: On physical tape libraries the unload after completion option moves the cartridge to the mail slot, if the mail slot is enabled and empty.

  1. Click Create.

NOTE: You cannot select a cartridge from a Replicating Target Library for export. The Roll column in the Devices section tells you what sort of library you have selected.

  1. The process warns you that the cartridge data on the HP D2D Backup System will be removed once it has been exported. You must click OK to continue. It also checks that media is locked in the attached tape storage device and that it is blank. If it is not blank, you are given option of overwriting it or canceling the job. Finally, it checks that there is cartridge data on the slot to be exported (it may have been subsequently moved by the backup application.)

NOTE: In the case of libraries some of these checks can only be made after loading the cartridge in a tape drive, which takes approximately one minute.

  1. The Job Status page is displayed and you can view progress in the final column.

  2. Once the export completes successfully, the cartridge is removed from the mail slot.

NOTE: If you cancel the process, remember to use the backup application (or the Web Management Interface) to move the cartridge back from the mail slot to the cartridge slot.

To import from attached tape storage device

An import operation may be performed on a physical cartridge in the attached tape drive. The cartridge is copied to the target device on the HP D2D Backup System. The operation will either automatically create a new cartridge in the mail slot of a library device or replace the data on a cartridge in a standalone tape drive device. The mail slot or cartridge must be empty.

  1. Locate the mail slot in the Cartridge list and click on the Next button. (There is an Import label in the right column of the mail slot.)
  2. This displays the second page of the wizard. (Or reports an error if no tape storage devices are currently attached to the HP D2D Backup System.)
  3. Select the attached tape drive from the pull-down list, the required physical slot if it is a tape library, the required verify/compare option and whether the physical cartridge should be unloaded after the operation completes.

NOTE: In the case of libraries some of these checks can only be made after loading the cartridge in a tape drive, which takes approximately one minute.

4. Click Create.

  1. Once the import has completed successfully, the cartridge is in the mail slot. Use the backup application (or Web Management Interface) to move the data back into the library slots. Backup applications have a number of terms to describe this action, such as insert. Refer to the documentation supplied with your backup application for further details.

When you import a cartridge:

• If it is less than 200 GB, the cartridge Max Size is set to 200 GB.
- If it is over 200 GB, the cartridge Max Size is set to 400 GB.
- If it is over 400 GB, the cartridge Max Size is set to 800 GB.
• If it is over 800 GB, the cartridge Max Size is set to 1.6 TB.

• Cartridges over 1.6 TB are not writable.

•The Used Size is always reported correctly.

Scheduled jobs (Tape Attach)

This page provides a 3-step wizard that allows you to create, edit and delete schedules for export and copy operations. You can also run a job immediately, rather than wait until its next schedule time.

Five types of schedule are allowed: daily, weekly, day of month, weekday of month and after write. The After Write option runs the job immediately after the cartridge has been written. Up to 50 schedules may be created.

D2D85 CR20545113 : IPV4 16.26.130.51 : IPV6 2620 0 a17:e320 21a:dtftfeoc:ccb064 Configuration Manual Jobs Scheduled Jobs Active Jobs Job History Devices Name Cartridges Connection Device Type Port Role Library 1 24 Not Connected MSL G3 Series (2x24) /LTO 3 iCSI Port Non Replicating Library 2 24 Not Connected MSL G3 Series (2x24) /LTO 3 iCSI Port Non Replicating Library 3 24 Not Connected MSL G3 Series (2x24) /LTO 3 iCSI Port Non Replicating Configure Schedule 1 → 2 → 3 Slot Selection copy Slot 1 Physical Slot Selection HP Ultrium 0:0:0 Frequency Selection New Scheduled Job Schedule Name Schedule 1 Schedule Type Weekly Day Sunday Run this week and every 0. Time 14 48 Active ✓ Unload After Completion Verify Full ✓ Back Create Language English © 2009 Hewlett-Packard Company, LP.

When an export or copy scheduled job is run, it automatically overwrites the cartridge in the drive. If the cartridge is not blank, there is no warning and no record in the job log.

NOTE: The backup application is not automatically updated with any schedules created on the HP D2D Backup System. The two are independent of each other. If you want the backup app schedules to work in conjunction with a schedule on the HP D2D Backup System, you must coordinate them manually.

To create a scheduled job

  1. Select Scheduled jobs from the Tape Attach section of the navigation bar. A scrollable list of existing schedules is displayed together with details of the next scheduled tape job.
  2. Click Create.

NOTE: The Create button is not present if you have already created 50 schedules. You need edit or delete existing schedules if you want to create new ones.

  1. Select the Library in the Virtual Devices list at the top of the page to display a list of the slots in that library. The last column shows you what action is available for a slot.

• Copy is available for numbered slots.
• Export or Import is available for the mail slot.
- Note the icon in the last column heading for the numbered slots. Click on this icon to copy the last written cartridge to physical tape; there is no need to specify the slot n
- If a slot has already been selected for a schedule, the Scheduled box is checked. Slots may be used on only one schedule.

Scheduled Tape Job Wizard ✓ Welcome ✓ Select Local Library ▶ Select Cartridge Select Physical Device / Drive Configure Job Summary Step 2 - Select Cartridge The purpose of this slot is to select the source cartridge. Virtual cartridges can only be used as the source of one schedule. ライブラリ + Job Type Last Written Copy Location Barcode Used Size Max Size Write Protected Last Written Job Type Mail Slot Export Items Per Page: 200 Location Barcode Used Size Max Size Write Protected Scheduled Last Written Job Type Slot 1 0AFSCP34 Blank 1600 GB - Copy Slot 2 0AFSCP38 564 MB 1600 GB - 19-Feb- 2011 11:35 Slot 3 0AFSCP38 Blank 1600 GB - Copy Slot 4 0AFSCP37 Blank 1600 GB - Copy Slot 5 0AFSCP38 Blank 1600 GB - Copy Slot 6 0AFSCP38 Blank 1600 GB - Copy Slot 7 0AFSCP3A Blank 1600 GB - Copy Slot 8 0AFSCP38 Blank 1600 GB - Copy Items Per Page: 200 < Back Next > Cancel Help

  1. Select the required slot. If a valid slot is selected, the Next button is active.
  2. Click Next. This displays the second page of the wizard. (Or reports an error if no tape storage devices are currently attached to the HP D2D Backup System.)

Scheduled Tape Job Wizard ✓ Welcome ✓ Select Local Library ✓ Select Cartridge Select Physical Device / Drive Configure Job Summary Step 3 - Select Physical Device / Drive The purpose of this step is to select the target device / drive. When selecting a library, a physical slot can only be used in one schedule. Physical Devices Name Device Type Vendor Product Name Status HP Ultrum 0 $10.0 Standalone HP Ultrum 5-SCSI Online < Back Next > Cancel Help

  1. Select the appropriate Physical Device to display a list of the slots in that device.

NOTE: If a slot has already been selected for a schedule, the Scheduled box is checked. Slots may be used on only one schedule.

  1. Click on the appropriate physical slot. If a valid slot is selected, the Next button is active.
  2. Click Next to display the final page of the wizard.

Scheduled Tape Job Wizard ✓ Welcome ✓ Select Local Library ✓ Select Cambridge ✓ Select Physical Device / Drive ► Configure Job Summary Step 4 - Configure Job The purpose of this site is to confine the job. Including repetition and timina. New Scheduled Job Schedule Name Schedule 1 Schedule Type Weekly Day Sunday Run this week and every Week Time 11 13 Active ✓ Unload After Completion ✓ Verify Full ✓ < Back Next > Cancel Help

  1. Enter a name for the Schedule and select the appropriate Scheduling parameters. Click Create.

Table 33 Job schedule parameters

This field allows you to provide a meaningful name for the scheduled job.Schedule Nam
Schedule Type:For daily jobs, selectDaily.For weekly jobs, selectWeekly.For jobs that you wish to run on a specific date in the month, selectDay of the Month.For jobs that you wish to run on a specific day and week in the month, selectWeekday of Month.For jobs that you wish to run as soon as the cartridge has been written, selectAfter Write.
Day:This field is not relevant forDailyjobs andAfter Writejobs. ForWeeklyjobs, select the day of the week. ForMonthly by day, select a day between 1 and 31. For months w less than 31 days, the job is always run on the last day of the month. ForWeekdayMonth, select First/Second/Third/Fourth/Last week and then the day of the week.
Time:This field is not relevant forAfter Writejobs. It is the time at which the job is to run: hour (24-hour clock) and minute.
Active:Use this check box to control whether a schedule is active. The default is active (box is checked).
Unload After Completion:Use this check box you to control whether the cartridge is unloaded once the scheduled job completes. The default is to remain loaded (the box is not checked). If the attached device is a library the tape will be moved to the mail slot if there is an empty mail slc
Verify:This determines how the data that has been created on the physical cartridge is to be verified with the original data on the HP D2D Backup system. There are three options: None, Quick and Full. The default is Full.

Sorting and searching scheduled jobs

Click on any column heading to sort jobs according to that criterion. For example, click on Next Expiry Time to sort the jobs according to the time they next run.

Click on Show search-box to display a Filter field and one drop-down menu.

• Use the right-hand drop-down menu to filter on All, Name, Schedule or Mode/Slot.

•Type a search string into the Filter box.

To view, edit or delete existing schedules

- Locate the schedule in the scrollable list and click to display the schedule details.

  • Click Edit to make schedule details editable. Make the required changes and click Update. (You cannot edit the schedule Type.)
  • Click Delete to delete the schedule completely. You will be prompted to confirm the delete action. (Remember that you can also disable the job temporarily by de-selecting the Active checkbox.)
    • Click Run now to run the schedule immediately.

Table 34 Scheduled job details

This field allows you to provide a meaningful name for the scheduled job.Name:
Schedule Type:For daily jobs, this isDaily.For weekly jobs, this isWeekly.For jobs that you wish to run on a specific date in the month, this isDay of the Month.For jobs that you wish to run on a specific day and week in the month, this isWeekday of Month.For jobs that you wish to run as soon as the cartridge has been written, this isAfter Write.
Virtual Library Name:This is the name of the library on the HP D2D that you selected for the export or copy job.
Virtual Slot:This is the slot number that you selected on the library on the HP D2D. For a copy job, select the slot number. For an export job, select the mail slot. You can also select theLast Written cartridge to copy or export data from the last backup rather than having to specify a specific slot.
Physical Device:This is the physical tape library or tape drive connected to the HP D2D, to which the cartridge will be exported or copied.
Physical Slot:This is the slot on the physical storage device to which the cartridge will be exported or copied.
Day:This field is not relevant forDailyjobs andAfter Writejobs. ForWeeklyjobs, select the day of the week. ForMonthly by day, select a day between 1 and 31. For months with less than 31 days, the job is always run on the last day of the month. ForWeekday of Month, select First/Second/Third/Fourth/Last week and then the day of the week.
Time:This field is not relevant forAfter Writejobs. It is the time at which the job is to run: hour (24-hour clock) and minute.
Active:Use this check box to control whether a schedule is active. The default is active (box is checked).
Eject Physical Cartridge:This checkbox allows you to control whether the cartridge is unloaded from the physical tape device once the scheduled job completes. The default is not to eject the physical cartridge. If the attached device is a library the tape will be moved to the mail slot if there is an empty mail slot.
Verify:This determines how the data that has been created on the physical cartridge is to be verified with the original data on the HP D2D Backup system. There are three options: None, Quick and Full. The default is Full.

Active Jobs (Tape Attach)

This page displays the status of any current tape import, export or copy operations.

  • If no such operations are currently in progress, a link will be provided to the Tape Attach Job History page.
    If a job is in progress, it shows job mode (copy, export or import), HP D2D library device, cartridge barcode, start time, duration, verify and data size. The final column shows the Job Status. If the job is running, this will include a progress bar for all relevant activities in the

operation, such as copy and verify (if requested). This column also shows any error or information messages.

D2D Backup System Home Virtual Tape Devices NAS Configuration Status Tape Attach Replication Administration d2dguikevpic02 : IPV4 16.26.130.91 : IPV6 2620:0:a17:e020:21a:4bff:febc:ccb0/64 Configuration Manual Jobs Scheduled Jobs Active Jobs Job History Job Status No Jobs are currently in progress. To view the status of any previous jobs that have run please refer to the Tape Attach Job History page Language English © 2009 Hewlett-Packard Company, L.P.

To cancel a job

To cancel a job in progress, click Cancel job. You are asked to confirm that you wish to cancel the job.

If a job is canceled during the copy, export or import phase, this cancels the transfer of data

NOTE: There are three phases to an export job: copy, an optional verify and subsequent removal of cartridge data from the HP D2D Backup System. If the job is cancelled during the copy pr an error will be reported and the data will remain on the HP D2D Backup System. If it is cc during the verify process, the data will be left intact on the physical tape and the data will s removed from the HP D2D Backup System.

If an error occurs

Errors may occur if there is a tape read/write media problem, if there is not enough capacity the physical cartridge or if there is a verify error. Errors may also occur if the backup applica accesses the cartridge that is being exported/imported or copied.

Errors are reported in the Job Status column on this page.

IMPORTANT: If an error occurs during export or copy, you do not lose any data. The original data remains unaltered in its original location on the HP D2D Backup System.

Job History (Tape Attach)

This page provides details of the last 1000 tape export, import and copy jobs. The job mode (copy, export or import), HP D2D library device, slot and cartridge barcode, physical device n slot and barcode, start time and job status are displayed. The most recent job is shown at the of a scrollable list. The final column shows the Job Status.

D2D Backup System Home Virtual Tape Devices NAS Configuration Status Tape Attach Replication Administration d2dguikevpic02 : IPV4 16.26.130.91 : IPV6 2620:0:a17:e020:21a:4bff:febc:ccb0/64 Configuration Manual Jobs Scheduled Jobs Active Jobs Job History Job History + Show Search Box Job ID Mode Library Name Slot Barcode Physical Device Physical Physical Barcode Start Time Job Status 43 Import Library 5 1 3C416474 HP Ultrium 0:0:0:0 - - 25-Sep-2009 3:10pm 42 Import Library 2 1 3C416474 HP Ultrium 0:0:0:0 - - 25-Sep-2009 9:03am 41 Copy Library 2 2 3C416474 HP Ultrium 0:0:0:0 - - 25-Sep-2009 9:02am 40 Export Library 2 1 3C416473 HP Ultrium 0:0:0:0 - - 25-Sep-2009 9:00am 39 Import Library 2 1 3C416473 HP Ultrium 0:0:0:0 - - 25-Sep-2009 8:52am 24 Sep 2009 Language English © 2009 Hewlett-Packard Company, L.P

Sorting and searching the job history

Click on any column heading to sort messages according to that criterion. For example, click on Start Time to sort the messages according to time and date.

Click on Show Search Box to display a Filter field and two drop-down menus.

  • Use the right-hand drop-down menu to filter on job status, for example to display all jobs with Error messages.
  • Use the middle drop-down menu to select a column (or All) and then type a search string into the Filter box.

Glossary

A

Autoloaders

An autoloader is a Virtual Tape Device that has a single tape drive and multiple storage slots.

(A library has multiple tape drives.) Each storage slot contains a cartridge that can be allocated to a specific backup task; for example, one cartridge can hold Monday's data, another can be Tuesday's data, and so on. In this way, backup applications are able to implement tape rotation strategies that accommodate differing backup requirements for daily, weekly, monthly, yearly backups.

B

Backup devices and slots

See Virtual Tape Devices.

C

CIFS

Common Internet File System (CIFS) is a protocol for interfacing to hosts on a Windows network.

The HP StoreOnce Backup System supports this interface for connecting to NAS targets from c Windows network.

D

Deduplication

Data deduplication compares blocks of data being written to the backup device with data blocks

previously stored on the device. If duplicate data is found, a pointer is established to the original data, rather than storing the duplicate data sets. This removes, or "deduplicates," the redundant blocks. See also the HP StoreOnce Backup System Concepts Guide.

The main benefit of deduplication is that it is possible to store more data and retain data for longer on each device. The host using the device has access to a greater depth of historical that would otherwise have been archived offline.

Figure 55 Data stored after deduplication
Original Data New Version After De-duplication

E

Emulation types

HP StoreOnce products emulate a range of physical Tape Autoloaders or Tape Libraries. Supported emulation types are listed below:

•HP 1x8 G2 Autoloader (HP D2D2500)
•HP MSL2024 Library
•HP MSL4048 Library
•HP D2DBS Library

•HP MSL8096 Library (HP D2D4300/D2D4100)
•HP ESL-E Library (HP D2D4300/D2D4100)
•HP EML-E Library (HP D2D4300/D2D4100)
•HP D2DBS Generic Library

If it is supported by your backup application, HP D2DBS Generic Library is the preferred emulation type because it does not emulate any physical library types in existence and is clearly identifiable as a StoreOnce device. It is the most flexible emulation type available; however, backup application support varies by software vendor.

F

Fibre Channel (FC)

Fibre Channel (FC) supports network connectivity over fibre optic cabling or copper wiring. FC has a different set of standards and network connection protocol to Ethernet and different configuration requirements. FC HP StoreOnce Backup Systems may be connected to both a Fibre Channel SAN and an Ethernet (as an iSCSI device) network. The FC connection is used only to transfer backup data from the host to the HP StoreOnce Backup System. Access to the Web Management Interface is always across an Ethernet connection.

H

Hosts

A server that is being used to back up to the StoreOnce system via iSCSI or Fibre Channel, this may also be a backup application media server which can back up other servers on the network that do not have a direct iSCSI or Fibre Channel connection to the StoreOnce Backup System.

Housekeeping

If data is deleted from the StoreOnce system (e.g a virtual cartridge is overwritten or erased), any unique chunks will be marked for removal, any non-unique chunks are de-referenced and their reference count decremented. The process of removing chunks of data is not an inline operation because this would significantly impact performance. This process, termed "housekeeping", runs on the appliance as a background operation, it runs on a per cartridge and NAS file basis and will run as soon as the cartridge is unloaded and returned to its storage slot or a NAS file has completed writing and has been closed by the appliance. See also the StoreOnce Backup System Concepts Guide.

|

iSCSI

On an Ethernet network the HP StoreOnce Backup System is configured as an iSCSI device. This means that the HP StoreOnce Backup System plugs directly into the network, but it presents device as directly-attached SCSI autoloaders to host machines. In order to function, it requires an iSCSI initiator. For more information about iSCSI, see the HP StoreOnce Backup System Installation and Configuration Guide. Linux and UNIX users should also refer to the Linux and UNIX Configuration Guide on the HP StoreOnce Backup System CD-ROM for more information.

L

Library

library is a Virtual Tape Device that appears to the backup application on the host as a physical tape library. A tape library is a backup device that has multiple drives and multiple storage slots. Each storage slot contains a cartridge. This provides considerable storage capacity and full support for tape rotation strategies. The difference between an autoloader and a library is that a library can support multiple tape drives whereas an autoloader only has one tape drive. (It may be necessary to upgrade your backup application to support libraries.)

N

NAS Shares

Devices on HP StoreOnce Backup Systems may be configured as Virtual Tape devices or as NAS (Network Attached Storage) targets for backup applications. NAS target devices on an HP StoreOnce Backup System provide network file share access that is optimized for backup to disk and are referred to as NAS Shares in the Web Management Interface.

All HP StoreOnce devices that are configured for NAS automatically make use of HP deduplication, ensuring efficient and cost-effective use of disk space.

It is important to understand that the HP StoreOnce network share is intended to be used ON by backup applications that "back up to disk". Do not use the device as a drag-and-drop grid file store.

NFS Network File System (NFS) is a protocol for interfacing to hosts on a Linux or UNIX network. The HP StoreOnce Backup System supports this interface for connecting to NAS targets on the HP StoreOnce appliance from a Linux or UNIX network host.

NTP Network Time Protocol (NTP) provides support for automatic time synchronization. See also Page 86.

R

RAID RAID stands for Redundant Array of Inexpensive (or Independent) Devices, which is a data storage scheme that divides data among multiple hard drives, increasing data reliability and throughput. The HP D2D2500 Series Backup System is a RAID 5 device. It has four disks, but if one of disks fails, no data is lost and the HP StoreOnce Backup System continues to operate correctly. The HP D2D4100/4300 Series Backup System is a RAID 6 device, which offers the best combination of data protection and capacity for disk arrays. It provides protection against dual disk failures and failures while a single disk is rebuilding. HP D2D4100 and 4300 Series Ba Systems also have an online spare disk (in the appliance itself and on each expansion shelf), which further enhances the reliability of the product. If one disk fails, the online spare disk immediately takes its place.

Replication Replication is a standard term used to describe a way of synchronizing data between hardware in two physical locations. HP StoreOnce Replication allows users to replicate data from cartridge on one HP StoreOnce Backup System to mapped slots on another HP StoreOnce Backup System on a remote site or the same system. Once configured (using the simple-to-use wizard), replicated occurs automatically, ensuring data is mirrored from the source to the target HP StoreOnce Ba Systems. Deduplication ensures that network traffic is minimized. See also the HP StoreOnce Backup System Concepts Guide.

S

Storage capacity The physical storage capacity of the HP StoreOnce Backup System is:

  • HP D2D2502: 2 TB (4 × 500 GB); HP D2D2504: 4 TB (4 × 1 TB)
  • HP D2D4106: 6 TB (12 x 500 GB). One additional shelf may be connected to the unit, which increases the total capacity to 12 TB (24 x 500 GB).
  • HP D2D4112: 12 TB (12 x 1 TB). One additional shelf may be connected to the unit, which increases the total capacity to 24 TB (24 x 1 TB).
  • HP D2D4312: 12 TB (12 x 1 TB). Up to three additional shelves may be connected to the unit, which increases the total capacity to 48 TB (48 x 1 TB)
  • HP D2D4324: 24 TB (12 x 2 TB). Up to three additional shelves may be connected to the unit, which increases the total capacity to 96 TB (48 x 2 TB)

However, in order to ensure a high level of data integrity, the disks use RAID protection. This reduces the available capacity but ensures that, in the event of a disk failure in the device, it will be no data loss.

Actual storage capacity is approximately:

• HP D2D2502: 1.5 TB; HP D2D2504: 3 TB
- HP D2D4106: 4.5 TB, or 9 TB, if an extra shelf is installed
- HP D2D4112: 9 TB, or 18 TB, if an extra shelf is installed
- HP D2D4312: 9 TB, up to a maximum of 36 TB with three extra shelves installed
- HP D2D4324: 18 TB, up to a maximum of 72 TB with three extra shelves installed

T

Tape rotation strategies

Tape rotation strategies determine when backups are run, the number of cartridges that are required and how they are reused. Virtual Tape Library targets on an HP StoreOnce Backup System can easily be incorporated into most tape rotation strategies. If your organization does not yet have a tape rotation strategy in place, see the HP StoreOnce Backup System Concepts Guide for example configurations.

V

Virtual Tape Devices

Virtual Tape Devices are backup targets on the HP StoreOnce Backup System to which the backu application on the hosts write data. They appear to the host as network-attached or locally-attached physical tape library or autoloader, but physically, they use disk space on the HP StoreOnce Backup System which, as in tape terminology, is referred to as slots or cartridges.

About this guide

This guide provides information about:

• Using the HP StoreOnce D2D Backup System
- Troubleshooting the HP StoreOnce D2D Backup System
•Replacing a hot-plug hard disk

Intended audience

This guide is intended for users who install, operate and maintain the HP StoreOnce D2D Bac System.

In addition to this guide, the following document provides related information:

  • Start here poster (printed): This document provides an overview of the installation process (available in English, French, German and Japanese)
  • HP StoreOnce Backup System Concepts Guide (PDF): If you are new to the HP StoreOnce Backup System, it is a good idea to read this guide before you configure your system. It describes the StoreOnce technology and advises how to plan the workload being placed on the HP StoreOnce Backup System in order to optimize performance and minimize the impact of deduplication, replication and housekeeping operations competing for resources.
    HP StoreOnce Backup System Installation and Configuration Guide (PDF): This guide describes how to install and carry out the initial configuration of your HP StoreOnce Backup System.
  • Linux and UNIX Configuration Guide (PDF): This guide contains information about configuring and using HP D2D Backup Systems with Linux and UNIX.
    D2D Best Practices for VTL, NAS and Replication implementations: This guide describes best practices and also includes examples using different backup applications.

You can find these documents from the Manuals page of the HP Business Support Center web http://www.hp.com/support/manuals

In the Storage section, click Storage Solutions and then select your product.

Document conventions

Table 35 Document conventions

ElementConvention
Cross-reference links and e-mail addressesBlue text: Table 35 (page 171
website addressesBlue, underlined text: http://www.hp.com
Bold textKeys that are pressedText typed into a GUI element, such as a boxGUI elements that are clicked or selected, such as menu and list items, buttons, tabs, and check boxes
Text emphasisItalic text

Table 35 Document conventions (continued)

ElementConvention
Monospace textFile and directory namesSystem outputCodeCommands, their arguments, and argument values
Monospace, italic textCode variablesCommand variables
Emphasized monospace textMonospace, bold text

!

!

Indicates that failure to follow directions could result in bodily harm or death.

:

Indicates that failure to follow directions could result in damage to equipment or data.

!

:

Provides clarifying information or specific instructions.

NOTE: Provides additional information.

HP technical support

For worldwide technical support information, see the HP support website:

http://www.hp.com/support

Before contacting HP, collect the following information:

•Product model names and numbers
•Technical support registration number (if applicable)
•Product serial numbers
- Error messages
- Operating system type and revision level
•Detailed questions

Customer self repair

HP customer self repair (CSR) programs allow you to repair your StoreOnce product. If a CSR po needs replacing, HP ships the part directly to you so that you can install it at your convenience. Some parts do not qualify for CSR. Your HP-authorized service provider will determine whether a repair can be accomplished by CSR.

For more information about CSR, contact your local service provider. For North America, see the CSR website:

http://www.hp.com/go/selfrepair

Registering your HP D2D Backup System

Once you have installed and tested your HP D2D Backup System please take a few minutes to register your product. You can register via the web (http://www.register.hp.com).

To ensure your registration is complete, there are a number of questions on the electronic form are mandatory. Other questions are optional. However, the more you feel able to complete, th better HP can meet your needs.

Subscription service

HP recommends that you register your product at the Subscriber's Choice for Business website: http://www.hp.com/go/e-updates

After registering, you will receive e-mail notification of product enhancements, new driver versio software updates, and other product resources.

HP websites

For additional information, see the following HP websites:

  • http://www.hp.com
  • http://www.hp.com/go/ebs
  • http://www.hp.com/go/connect
  • http://www.hp.com/go/storage
  • http://www.hp.com/service_locator
  • http://www.hp.com/support/manuals
  • http://www.hp.com/support/downloads

Documentation feedback

HP welcomes your feedback.

To make comments and suggestions about product documentation, please send a message to storagedocs.feedback@hp.com. All submissions become the property of HP.

Index

Symbols

10Gb ports, 34

10Gbport, 35

A

active session, 7

AD authentication, 24

AD domain, leaving, 30

admin

software page, 88

administration

backup & restore page, 93

date & time page, 85

housekeeping page, 87

license page, 94

password,82

security page, 83

shutdown page, 88

support page, 91

appliance page

replication, 73

audience, 171

authentication

CIFS server, 22

autoloader, 13

see also devices

B

backup & restore page, 93

backup fails, 131

mapping deleted, 68

bandwidth limiting, 79

barcode, 18

barcode characters, 14

beacon LED, 52, 54

beacon mode, 36, 119

BIOSupgrading, 135

blackout windows, 80

housekeeping, 88

browser buttons not displayed, 7

C

cancel

tape drive job, 165

capacity upgrade kit

LEDs, 119

cartridge

copy, 158

export, 159

import, 160

in tape drive, 154

cartridges

after multiple disk failure, 152

creating, 20

editing max size, 19

in physical tape library, 155

moving/unloading, 20

removing, 19

write protecting, 19

cartridges page, 18

CIFS server

authentication, 22

configuring, 22

CIFS server page, 22

CIFS share

connecting to, 24

creating, 23

configuration

email alerts, 43

Fibre Channel page, 36

iSCSI, 36

Microsoft Exchange Server, 44

network, 33

SNMP, 37

troubleshoot, 134

configuration page

tape attach, 154

connect to

CIFS share, 24, 32

connecting from backup system

troubleshoot, 125

connecting to network

troubleshoot, 125

connection

status, 11

conventions

document, 171

text symbols, 172

copy cartridge, 158

create

cartridge, 20

cartridges, 152

CIFS share, 23

device, 13

NFS share, 31

schedule, 161

storage pool, 151

customer self repair, 172

D

D2DBS Generic Library, 11

date & time page, 85

date and time

editing, 85

date format

editing, 85

deduplication, 14

delete

cartridge, 19

device, 16

schedule, 164

storage pool, 150

devices

create new, 13

delete, 16

edit details, 15

view details, 13

devices page, 10

Devices tab

deleting cartridges on, 19

DHCP, 35

DHCP Gateway, 34

DHCP gateway, 35

diagnostic fibre channel device, 130

disk

failed, 137

installing, 143

multiple failed, 146

disk space

capacity reached, 130

disk status, 52, 54

disk usage, 53

identifying, 52

Disks status, 49

DNS server name, 34

document

conventions, 171

related documentation, 171

documentation

HP website, 171

providing feedback, 173

domain, 35

download support ticket, 92

drive emulation, 13

drives

defining number of, 14

E

edit

date format, 85

device details, 15

network settings, 34

NTP settings, 85

password, 82

schedule, 164

edit NAS share, 21

email alerts

configuring Exchange Server, 44

email alerts page, 43

EML-E series Library, 12

emulation type, 11, 13

error

job history, 165

log page, 57

tape drive job, 165

ESL-E series Library, 12

event history

replication, 81

export cartridge, 159

F

failed battery

identifying, 50

failed disk

identifying, 50, 52, 54, 137

more than one, 146

replacing, 142

serial number, 52, 54

Fibre Channel

configuration page, 36

LEDs, 119

status page, 55

firewalls

with replication, 79

firmware

upgrading tape storage device, 156

flexible emulation, 12

Force login, 7

G

gateway, 34

general settings

replication, 78

generate support ticket, 92

gui see web management interface

H

hard disk firmwareupgrading, 135

hardware monitoring, 121

hardware replacement, 134

help

obtaining, 172

host(A) record, 25

hot-plug drives

LEDs, 118

housekeeping

blackout windows, 88

housekeeping graph, 87

housekeeping page, 87

HP

technical support, 172

HP 1x8 G2 Autoloader, 12

HP D2D2504/2502 Backup System

LEDs, 117

HP D2D4112/4106 Backup System

LEDs, 116

HP D2D4324/4312 Backup System

LEDs, 115

|

import cartridge, 160

inactive logout time

setting, 83

initial logon, 7

Interface Information tab, 15

IP address, 35

iSCSI

initiator name, 14

status page, 55

troubleshoot, 130

iSCSI page, 36

J

job history page sorting and searching, 166 tape attach, 165

L

language pack description of, 89 upgrading, 90

last written, cartridges, 19

leave AD domain, 30

LEDs capacity upgrade kit, 119 Fibre Channel, 119 hot-plug drives, 118 HP D2D2504/2502, 117 HP D2D4112/4106, 116 HP D2D4324/4312, 115

library name, 11

library status, 11

license page, 94

local settings replication, 77

location, cartridges, 18

log page, 57 sorting, 57

login, 7

M

manual jobs page, 157

mapping deleted backup fails, 68

max size, cartridges, 18

maximum jobs replication, setting, 78

MIBs, 39

Microsoft Exchange Server, 44

MMC, 27

monitoring hardware, 121

move cartridge, 20

MSL G3 series (2x24) Library, 12

MSL G3 series (4x48) Library, 12

MSL G3 series (8x96) Library, 12

N

NAS

CIFS server page, 22

NFS server page, 30

shares page, 21

NAS mapping configuration replication, 66

NAS share

editing, 21

NetBIOS name resolution, 33

network edit settings, 34

reset settings and password, 35

status page, 54

troubleshooting, 127

network mode, 34

network name, 34

network page, 33

NFS server specifying NFS hosts, 30

NFS server page, 30

NFS share connecting to, 32 creating, 31

nfs share state handle error, 129

NTP server fails, 127

NTP server stops, 86

NTP settings editing, 8

O

other sources of information, 6

out of sync settings, 78

P

password default, 7 editing, 82 resetting, 82

pause housekeeping, 88

pause replication jobs, 81

performance troubleshoot, 126

permissions source appliance, 76

Pointer(PTR) record, 26

port, 11 defining number of, 14

power off cleanly, 88

power on/off troubleshoot, 128

R

RAID battery, 50, 134 RAID Parity Initialization, 7

RAID status, 50, 54

RAID5, 136

RAID6, 136

recovery replication, 96, 104

recovery wizard reverse replication, 96, 104

related documentation, 171

replace disk, 142

replication and firewalls, 79 appliance page, 73 blackout windows, 80

event history, 81

general settings, 78

local appliance, 77

NAS mappings page, 66

pause jobs, 81

recovering source, 96, 104

status page, 58

virtual tape mappings page, 59

replication fails, 131, 132

replication ports, 79

replication recovery

over WAN, 100, 107

using colocation, 101, 108

using wizard, 96, 104

replication wizard, 61

reset

network settings, 35

reset password, 82

restore

no tape drive connected, 112

replication, 96, 104

shares, 132

single files, 111

VTLs, 132

role, 11

running out of disk space, 130

S

schedule

create, 161

delete, 164

edit, 164

sorting and searching, 163

view, 164

schedule page, 160

search

schedule, 163

searching

job history, 166

log page, 57

replication event history, 81

security page, 83

share synchronization

logging progress, 78

shares

failed to start, 132

shares page, 21

shelves, 51

Shelves status, 51

Show/Hide Details, 10

shutdown page, 88

slots

defining number of, 11, 14

SNMP

configuration, 37

enabling, 38

MIBs, 39

SNMP status, 38

software page, 88

sort

schedule, 163

sorting

job history, 166

log page, 57

replication event history, 81

source appliance permissions, 76

SSL certificate, 83

status

disk page, 52

Fibre Channel page, 55

icons, 9

information, 8

iSCSI page, 55

log page, 57

network, 54

RAID page, 54

storage page, 46

storage reporting page, 56

Storage—Disks page, 49

Storage—RAID page, 50

Storage—Shelves page, 51

system activity, 46

status page

replication, 58

tape attach, 164

storage capacity, 136

storage pool

creating, 151

deleting, 150

storage pools, 47

storage reporting page, 56

storage shelf

troubleshoot, 131

storage status page, 46

Storage-Disks status, 49

Storage-RAID status, 50

Storage-Shelves status, 51

StoreOnce Backup System

logging on, 6

subnet mask, 35

Subscriber's Choice, HP, 173

summary page, 8

support page, 91

support ticket

download, 92

generate, 92

symbols in text, 172

system activity page, 46

system information, 91

system name, 38

T

tape attach

configuration page, 154

job history page, 165

manual jobs, 157

schedule page, 160

status page, 164

tape drive

cancel job, 165

viewing details, 154

tape storage device

upgrading firmware, 156

target libraries

making visible, 16

technical support

HP, 172

service locator website, 173

testing email alerts, 43

text symbols, 172

troubleshoot

backup or replication, 131

browser buttons missing, 7

configuration, 134

connecting from backup system, 125

connecting to network, 125

iSCSI, 130

network, 127

performance, 126

power on/off, 128

storage shelf, 131

using 10Gb ports, 126

Web Management Interface, 127, 129

troubleshooting

NTP server, 127

physical tape library, autoloader, 155

RAID battery, 134

U

Ultrium VT, 12

unload cartridge, 20

upgrade language pack, 90

upgrade licenses, 134

upgrade software, 90

upgrades

BIOS firmware, 135

used size, cartridges, 18

user account page, 82

using 10Gb ports

troubleshoot, 126

V

view

device details, 13

schedule, 164

virtual libraries

failed to start, 132

virtual tape devices

cartridges page, 18

devices page, 10

virtual tape mappings

replication, 59

visible target libraries, 16

W

Web Management Interface

troubleshoot, 127, 129

web management interface, 6

summary page, 8

websites

customer self repair, 172

HP, 173

HP Subscriber's Choice for Business, 173

product manuals, 171

welcome message, 88

disabling, enabling, 83

write protect, cartridges, 19

Table of contents Click a title to access it
Manual assistant
Powered by Anthropic
Waiting for your message
Product information

Brand : HP

Model : StoreOnce G2

Category : NAS